NC0025321_Application (ATC)_20210729

mcgill Shaping Communities Together
.411
July 22, 2021
Ms. Min Xiao RECEIVED
Complex Permitting Unit JUL 2 9 2021
NCDEQ Division of Water Resources
Water Quality Permitting Section
9th Floor Archdale Building NCDEQIDWRINPDES
512 North Salisbury Street
Raleigh, North Carolina 27604
RE: Authorization to Construct Application
Wastewater Treatment Plant Sludge Storage Tank Improvements
Town of Waynesville, Haywood County, North Carolina
Dear Ms. Xiao:
On behalf of the Town of Waynesville, enclosed is the Authorization to Construct Application
submittal package for the above referenced project. The submittal package consists of one hard
copy and two electronic copies on CD of the following:
1. Application for Authorization to Construct Permit
2. Project Plans
3. Project Specifications
4. Design Calculations
5. Residuals Management Plan
6. NPDES and Residuals Permits
The project proposes to convert the existing anaerobic digester into an aerated sludge storage
tank.The anaerobic digestion equipment was previously removed in 2020 due to safety concerns.
The project generally consists of installation of a new positive displacement blower, diffused
aeration system, yard piping, and electrical improvements. Should you have any questions or
need any additional information please feel free to call our office at 828-252-0575.
Sincerely,
MCGILL ASSOCIATES, P.A.
Nelson Heringer, PE,
Project Engineer
Enclosures
cc: Rob Hites, Town Manager
MJ Chen, PE, PhD, McGill Associates
MCGILL ASSOCIATES 55 BROAD STREET,ASHEVILLE,NC 28801/828.252.0575/MCGILLASSOCIATES.COM

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
SECTION 1: INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION
A. The Division of Water Resources will accept this application package for review only if all of the items are provided and the
application is complete.Failure to submit all of the required items will result in the application package being returned as incomplete
per 15A NCAC 02T.0105(b).
B. Plans and specifications must be prepared in accordance with 15 NCAC 02H.0100,15A NCAC 02T,North Carolina General Statute
133-3, North Carolina General Statute 143-215.1, and Division of Water Resources Minimum Design Criteria for NPDES
Wastewater Treatment Facilities.
C. The plans and specifications submitted must represent a completed final design that is ready to advertise for bid.
D. Any content changes made to this Form ATC-12-14 shall result in the application package being returned.
E. The Applicant shall submit ONE ORIGINAL and ONE DIGITAL COPY (CD) of the application, all supporting documentation and
attachments. All information must be submitted bound or in a 3-ring binder, with a Section tab for each Section, except the
Engineering Plans.
F. Check the boxes below to indicate that the information is provided and the requirements are met.
G. If attachments are necessary for clarity or due to space limitations, such attachments are considered part of the application
package and must be numbered to correspond to the item referenced.
H. For any project that requires review under the State Environmental Policy Act(SEPA), an Authorization to Construct cannot be
issued prior to the completion of a State Clearinghouse advertisement period for a FONSI,EIS,etc.unless the project qualifies for
a Determination of Minor Construction Activity.
I. For more information,visit the Division of Water Resources web site at:https://deq.nc.gov/about/divisions/water-resources/water-
resources-permits/wastewater-branch/npdes-wastewater/authorization-to-construct.
J. In addition to this Authorization to Construct,the Applicant should be aware that other permits may be required from other Sections
of the Division of Water Resources(for example: reclaimed water facilities permits; Class A or B biosolids residuals permit).
SECTION 2:APPLICANT INFORMATION AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A. APPLICANT
Applicant's name Town of Waynesville
Signature authority's name per 15A NCAC 02T.0106(b) Rob Hites
Signature authority's title Town Manager
Complete mailing address 16 South Main Street,Waynesville, NC 28786
Telephone number 828.452.2491
Email address [e-mail]
B. PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER
Professional Engineer's name Nelson Heringer
Professional Engineer's title Project Engineer
North Carolina Professional Engineer's License No. 050993
Firm name McGill Associates, P.A.
Firm License number C-0459
Complete mailing address 55 Broad Street,Asheville, NC 28801
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 1

State of North Carolina
,.A Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
Telephone number 828.252.0575
Email address
C. NPDES PERMIT
NPDES Permit number NC0025321
Current Permitted flow(MGD)—include permit 6 MGD
flow phases if applicable
D. PROJECT DESCRIPTION
Provide a brief description of the project: Conversion of the existing anaerobic digester into an aerated sludge storage tank
including installation of a membrane tube diffused aeration system, installation of a rotary lobe blower, and associated yard
piping,control panels,and electrical site work.
SECTION 3:APPLICATION ITEMS REQUIRED FOR SUBMITTAL FOR ALL PROJECTS
A. Cover Letter
® The letter must include a request for the Authorization to Construct; the facility NPDES Number; a brief project description
that indicates whether the project is a new facility,facility modification,treatment process modification,or facility expansion;
the construction timeline;and a list of all items and attachments included in the application package.
❑ If any of the requirements of 15 NCAC 02H. 0100, 15A NCAC 02T, North Carolina General Statute 133-3, North Carolina
General Statute 143-215.1, and Division of Water Resources Minimum Design Criteria for NPDES Wastewater Treatment
Facilities are not met by the proposed design,the letter must include an itemized list of the requirements that are not met.
B. NPDES Permit
® Submit Part I of the Final NPDES permit for this facility that includes Part A(Effluent Limitations and Monitoring Requirements)
for the monthly average flow limit that corresponds to the work that is requested for this project.
C. Special Order by Consent
® If the facility is subject to any Special Orders by Consent(SOC),submit the applicable SOC.
❑ Not Applicable.
D. Finding of No Significant Impact or Record of Decision
❑ Submit a copy of the Finding of No Significant Impact or Record of Decision for this project.
❑ Provide a brief description of any of the mitigating factors or activities included in the approved Environmental Document
that impact any aspect of design of this project, if not specified in the Finding of No Significant Impact or Record of Decision.
® Not Applicable.
E. Engineering Plans
® Per 15A NCAC 02T.0504(c)(1),submit one set of detailed plans that have been signed,sealed and dated by a North Carolina
Licensed Professional Engineer.
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 2

State of North Carolina
,.a Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
Per 21 NCAC 56.1103(a)(6),the name,address and License number of the Licensee's firm shall be included on each sheet of
the engineering drawings.
® Plans must be labeled as follows: FINAL DRAWING—FOR REVIEW PURPOSES ONLY—NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION.
® 15A NCAC 02H .0124 requires multiple (dual at a minimum) components such as pumps, chemical feed systems, aeration
equipment and disinfection equipment. Is this requirement met by the design? ® Yes or ❑ No. If no, provide an
explanation:
Plans shall include:
® Plans for all applicable disciplines needed for bidding and construction of the proposed project(check as appropriate):
® Civil ❑ Not Applicable
Z Process Mechanical ❑ Not Applicable
❑ Structural ® Not Applicable
• Electrical 0 Not Applicable
® Instrumentation/Controls 0 Not Applicable
❑ Architectural ® Not Applicable
0 Building Mechanical ® Not Applicable
0 Building Plumbing ® Not Applicable
® Plan and profile views and associated details of all modified treatment units including piping,valves,and equipment(pumps,
blowers, mixers,diffusers,etc.)
® Are any modifications proposed that impact the hydraulic profile of the treatment facility?❑Yes or® No. If yes, provide
a hydraulic profile drawing on one sheet that includes all impacted upstream and downstream units. The profile shall include
the top of wall elevations of each impacted treatment unit and the water surface elevations within each impacted treatment
unit for two flow conditions: (1)the NPDES permitted flow with all trains in service and (2) the peak hourly flow with one
treatment train removed from service.
® Are any modifications proposed that impact the process flow diagram or process flow schematic of the treatment facility?
Yes or❑No. If yes,provide the process flow diagram or process flow schematic showing all modified flow paths including
aeration,recycle/return,wasting,and chemical feed,with the location of all monitoring and control instruments noted.
F. ® Engineering Specifications
® Per 15A NCAC 02T.0504(c)(2),submit one set of specifications that have been signed,sealed and dated by a North Carolina
Licensed Professional Engineer.
® Specifications must be labeled as follows: FINAL SPECIFICATIONS — FOR REVIEW PURPOSES ONLY — NOT RELEASED FOR
CONSTRUCTION.
Specifications shall include:
® Specifications for all applicable disciplines needed for bidding and construction of the proposed project (check as
appropriate):
• Civil ❑ Not Applicable
® Process Mechanical 0 Not Applicable
O Structural ® Not Applicable
® Electrical 0 Not Applicable
® Instrumentation/Controls 0 Not Applicable
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 3

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
❑ Architectural ® Not Applicable
❑ Building Mechanical ® Not Applicable
❑ Building Plumbing ® Not Applicable
® Detailed specifications for all treatment units and processes including piping, valves, equipment (pumps, blowers, mixers,
diffusers,etc.),and instrumentation.
® Means of ensuring quality and integrity of the finished product including leakage testing requirements for structures and
pipelines,and performance testing requirements for equipment.
® Bid Form for publicly bid projects.
G. Construction Sequence Plan
® Construction Sequence Plan such that construction activities will not result in overflows or bypasses to waters of the State.
The Plan must not imply that the Contractor is responsible for operation of treatment facilities. List the location of the
Construction Sequence Plan as in the Engineering Plans or in the Engineering Specifications or in both:See Sheet G-002.
H. Engineering Calculations
® Per 15A NCAC 02T.0504(c)(3),submit one set of engineering calculations that have been signed,sealed and dated by a North
Carolina Licensed Professional Engineer;the seal,signature and date shall be placed on the cover sheet of the calculations.
For new or expanding facilities and for treatment process modifications that are included in Section 4.C,the calculations shall
include at a minimum:
Z Demonstration of how peak hour design flow was determined with a justification of the selected peaking factor.
® Influent pollutant loading demonstrating how the design influent characteristics in Section 4.B.2 of this form were
determined.
® Pollutant loading for each treatment unit demonstrating how the design effluent concentrations in Section 4.B.2 of this form
were determined.
® Hydraulic loading for each treatment unit.
® Sizing criteria for each treatment unit and associated equipment(blowers, mixers, pumps,etc.)
® Total dynamic head(TDH)calculations and system curve analysis for each pump specified that is included in Section 4.C.6.
® Buoyancy calculations for all below grade structures.
® Supporting documentation that the specified auxiliary power source is capable of powering all essential treatment units.
I. Permits
® Provide the following information for each permit and/or certification required for this project:
Permit/ If Not Issued Provide
Not Date Date Certification Status and Expected
Permit/Certification Applicable Submitted Approved Number Issuance Date
Dam Safety x
Soil Erosion and Sediment Control x
USCOE /Section 404 Permit x
Water Quality Certification (401) x
USCOE/Section 10 x
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 4

State of North Carolina
r'a Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14) !,
Stormwater Management Plan x
CAMA x
NCDOT Encroachment Agreement x
Railroad Encroachment Agreement x
Other: x
J. Residuals Management Plan
® For all new facilities, expanding facilities, or modifications that result in a change to sludge production and/or sludge
processes, provide a Residuals Management Plan meeting the requirements of 15A NCAC 02T .0504(i) and 15A NCAC 02T
.0508;the Plan must include:
® A detailed explanation as to how the generated residuals(including trash,sediment and grit)will be collected, handled,
processed,stored,treated,and disposed.
® An evaluation of the treatment facility's residuals storage requirements based upon the maximum anticipated residuals
production rate and ability to remove residuals.
® A permit for residuals utilization or a written commitment to the Applicant from a Permittee of a Department approved
residuals disposal/utilization program that has adequate permitted capacity to accept the residuals or has submitted a
residuals/utilization program application.
® If oil,grease,grit or screenings removal and collection is a designated unit process,a detailed explanation as to how the
oil/grease will be collected, handled, processed,stored and disposed.
❑ Not Applicable.
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 5

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
SECTION 4: PROJECT INFORMATION
A. WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT FLOW INFORMATION—COMPLETE FOR NEW OR EXPANDING FACILITIES
1. Provide the following flow information:n/a;facility is not new or expanding
Plant Flows
Existing Plant Design MGD
Current NPDES Permit Limit MGD
Current Annual Average
(past 12 months) MGD
For Past 12 Months: For Past 24 Months:
Start Date: month/yr Start Date: month/yr
End Date: month/yr End Date: month/yr
Maximum Month MGD MGD
Maximum Day MGD MGD
Peak Hour MGD MGD
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 6

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
B. WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY DESIGN INFORMATION—COMPLETE FOR NEW OR EXPANDING FACILITIES AND
FOR TREATMENT PROCESS MODIFICATIONS
1. Have all of the requirements of 15 NCAC 02H. 0100, 15A NCAC 02T, North Carolina General Statute 133-3, North Carolina
General Statute 143-215.1, and Division of Water Resources Minimum Design Criteria for NPDES Wastewater Treatment
Facilities been met by the proposed design and specifications? ® Yes or❑ No. If no, provide justification as to why the
requirements are not met,consistent with 15A NCAC 02T.0105(n):
2. Provide the design influent and effluent characteristics that are used as the basis for the project design,and the NPDES
permit limits for the following parameters:
Project Basis of Design
Design Influent Design Influent
Influent Concentration Load
Concentration- (Must be (Must be
Current Annual supported by supported by
Average(past Engineering Engineering Design Effluent
12 months)if Calculations Calculations Concentration and/or NPDES Permit Limits
Parameter Available [Section 3.H]) [Section 3.H]) Load (monthly average)
Ammonia Nitrogen 9 mg/L Summer 9 mg/L Summer
(NH3 N) mg/L 23.1 mg/L 1,156 lb/day
21 mg/L Winter 21 mg/L Winter
Biochemical 30 mg/L Summer 30 mg/L Summer
Oxygen Demand 173 mg/L 220 mg/L 11,009 lb/day
(BOD5) 30 mg/L Winter 30 mg/L Winter
Fecal Coliform 200 per 100 mL 200 per 100 mL
Nitrate+Nitrite
Nitrogen(NO3-N + mg/L mg/L
NO2-N)
Total Kjeldahl mg/L
Nitrogen
mg/L mg/L
Total Nitrogen
lb/year lb/year
mg/L mg/L
Total Phosphorus mg/L mg/L lb/day
lb/year lb/year
Total Suspended 219 mg/L 260 mg/L 13,010 lb/day 30 mg/L 30 mg/L
Solids(TSS)
3. Based on the"Project Basis of Design"parameters listed above,will the proposed design allow the treatment facility to
meet the NPDES Permit Limits listed above?❑Yes or❑ No. If no,describe how and why the Permit Limits will not be
met:
4. Per 15A NCAC 02T.0505(j),by-pass and overflow lines are prohibited. Is this condition met by the design?®Yes or❑ No
If no,describe the treatment units bypassed,why this is necessary,and where the bypass discharges:
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 7

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
5. Per 15A NCAC 02T.0505(k),multiple pumps shall be provided wherever pumps are used. Is this condition met by the
design?®Yes or❑ No. If no,provide an explanation:
6. Per 1SA NCAC 02T.0505(1),power reliability shall be provided consisting of automatically activated standby power supply
onsite capable of powering all essential treatment units under design conditions,or dual power supply shall be provided
per 15A NCAC 02H.0124(2)(a). Is this condition met by the design? ®Yes or❑ No. If no,provide(as an attachment
to this Application)written approval from the Director that the facility:
➢ Has a private water supply that automatically shuts off during power failures and does not contain elevated water
storage tanks,and
➢ Has sufficient storage capacity that no potential for overflow exists,and
➢ Can tolerate septic wastewater due to prolonged detention.
7. Per 15A NCAC 02T.0505(o),a minimum of 30 days of residual storage shall be provided. Is this condition met by the
design? ®Yes or❑ No. If no,explain the alternative design criteria proposed for this project in accordance 15A NCAC
02T.105(n):
8. Per 15A NCAC 02T.0505(q),the public shall be prohibited from access to the wastewater treatment facilities. Explain how
the design complies with this requirement:The plant is enclosed by the fence and gate.
9. Is the treatment facility located within the 100-year flood plain? ®Yes or❑No. If yes,describe how the facility is protected
from the 100-year flood:All improvements specific to this project are located outside of the 100-year flood plain.
C. WASTEWATER TREATMENT UNIT AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INFORMATION—COMPLETE FOR NEW OR
EXPANDING FACILITIES AND FOR MODIFIED TREATMENT UNITS
1. PRELIMINARY AND PRIMARY TREATMENT(i.e., physical removal operations and flow equalization):
No.of Plan Sheet Specification Calculations
Treatment Unit Type Size per Unit Provided?
Units Reference Reference (Yes or No)
Manual Bar Screen MGD at peak hourly flow
Mechanical Bar
Screen
Grit Removal
Flow Equalization -- gallons
Primary Clarifier Circular ft diameter; ft side
water depth
Primary Clarifier Rectangular square feet; ft side
water depth
•
Other
2. SECONDARY TREATMENT(BIOLOGICAL REACTORS AND CLARIFIERS)(i.e.,biological and chemical processes to remove
organics and nutrients)
No.of Plan Sheet Specification Calculations
Treatment Unit Provided?
Units Type Size per Unit Reference Reference
(Yes or No)
Aerobic Zones/
Tanks
Anoxic Zones/ gallons
Tanks
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 8

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
Anaerobic
Zones/Tanks gallons
Sequencing Batch
Reactor(SBR) gallons
Membrane
Bioreactor(MBR) -- gallons
Secondary Clarifier Circular
Secondary Clarifier Rectangular square feet; ft
side water depth
Other
3. TERTIARY TREATMENT
No.of Plan Sheet Specification Calculations
Treatment Unit Type Size per Unit Provided?
Units Reference Reference (Yes or No)
Tertiary Clarifier Circular ft diameter; ft
side water depth
Tertiary Clarifier Rectangular square feet; ft
side water depth
Tertiary Filter square feet
Tertiary Membrane
Filtration square feet
Post-Treatment
Flow Equalization -- gallons
Post-Aeration gallons
Other
4. DISINFECTION
No.of Plan Sheet Specification Calculations
Treatment Unit Provided?
Units Type Size per Unit Reference Reference
(Yes or No)
gal/day per bank at
Ultraviolet Light (Parallel;in peak hourly flow;
series) number of banks;
number of lamps/bank
Chlorination liquid(Gas; gallons of contact tank/unit
tablet; liquid)
Dechlorination liquid(Gas; gallons of contact tank/unit
tablet; liquid)
5. RESIDUALS TREATMENT - -
No.of Plan Sheet Specification Calculations
Treatment Unit Provided?
Units Type Size per Unit Reference Reference
(Yes or No)
Gravity Thickening
Tank Gravity
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 9

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
Mechanical
Thickening/
Dewatering
Aerobic Digestion gallons
Anaerobic
Digestion gallons
Composting dry lb/hour
Drying dry lb/hour
Aerated
Other 1 Sludge Holding 521,680 gal C-102, 103 465131 YES
6. PUMP SYSTEMS(include influent,intermediate,effluent,major recycles,waste sludge,thickened waste sludge and plant
drain pumps)
No.of Capacity of Plan Sheet Specification
Location Pumps Purpose Type each pump Reference Reference
GPM I TDH
7. MIXERS
Power of
No.of Plan Sheet Specification
Location Purpose Type each Mixer
Mixers (HP) Reference Reference
8. BLOWERS
Capacity of
No.of Plan Sheet Specification
Location Purpose Type each Blower
Blowers (CFM) Reference Reference
ByAerated Sludge
1 Aeration Rotary Lobe 2121 C-102,C-501 431133
Holding Tank
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 10

State of North Carolina
111Z7,,
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
9. ODOR CONTROL
No.of Plan Sheet Specification
Location Units Purpose Type Reference Reference
D. SETBACKS—COMPLETE FOR NEW WASTEWATER TREATMENT STRUCTURES
1. The minimum distance for each setback parameter to the wastewater treatment/storage units per 15A NCAC 02T.0506(b)
are as follows:
Minimum Distance Is Minimum Distance
Required from Nearest Requirement met by the
Setback Parameter Design?If"No",identify
Treatment/Storage Setback Waivers in Item D.2
Unit
Below
Any habitable residence or place of assembly under separate 100 ft ®Yes ❑ No
ownership or not to be maintained as part of the project site
Any private or public water supply source 100 ft ®Yes ❑ No
Surface waters(streams—intermittent and perennial,perennial 50 ft ®Yes ❑ No
waterbodies,and wetlands)
Any well with exception of monitoring wells 100 ft ®Yes ❑ No
Any property line 50 ft ®Yes ❑ No
2. Have any setback waivers been obtained per 15A NCAC 02T .0506(d)? ❑ Yes or ❑ No. If yes, have these waivers been
written, notarized and signed by all parties involved and recorded with the County Register of Deeds? ❑Yes or❑ No. If
no,provide an explanation:
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 11

State of North Carolina
ITC Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL DUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
SECTION 5:APPLICATION CERTIFICATION BY PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER
Professional Engineer's Certification per 15A NCAC 02T.0105:
I, Nelson B. Heringer,attest that this application package for an Authorization to Construct
(Typed Name of Professional Engineer)
for the Waynesville WWTP Sludge Storage Tank Improvements.
(Facility and Project Name)
was prepared under my direct supervisory control and to the best of my knowledge is accurate,complete and consistent
with the information supplied in the engineering plans,specifications,calculations, and all other supporting
documentation for this project. I further attest that to the best of my knowledge the proposed design has been
prepared in accordance with all applicable regulations and statutes, 15 NCAC 02H. 0100, 15A NCAC 02T, North Carolina_
General Statute 133-3, North Carolina General Statute 143-215.1,and Division of Water Resources Minimum Design
Criteria for NPDES Wastewater Treatment Facilities, and this Authorization to Construct Permit Application,except as
provided for and explained in Section 4.B.1 of this Application. I understand that the Division of Water Resources'
issuance of the Authorization to Construct Permit may be based solely upon this Certification and that the Division may
waive the technical review of the plans,specifications,calculations and other supporting documentation provided in this
application package. I further understand that the application package may be subject to a future audit by the Division.
Although certain portions of this submittal package may have been prepared,signed and sealed by other professionals
licensed in North Carolina, inclusion of these materials under my signature and seal signifies that I have reviewed the
materials and have determined that the materials are consistent with the project design.
I understand that in accordance with General Statutes 143-215.6A and 143-215.6B,any person who knowingly makes
any false statement, representation, or certification in any application package shall be guilty of a Class 2 misdemeanor,
which may include a fine not to exceed$10,000, as well as civil penalties up to$25,000 per violation.
North Carolina Professional Engineer's seal with written signature placed over or adjacent to the seal and dated:
yktj of ESS p ��ti'%,
S
/ii,/ •
050993 Z
S
4CI E
i 4k-z
, o" ei'
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 12

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUAL.I T APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
SECTION 6: APPLICATION CERTIFICATION BY APPLICANT
Applicant's Certification per 15A NCAC 02T .0106(b):
I, Rob Hites,Town Manager,attest that this application package for an Authorization to Construct
(Typed Name of Signature Authority and Title)
for the Sludge Storage Tank Improvements.
(Facility and Project Name)
has been reviewed by me and is accurate and complete to the best of my knowledge. I also understand that if all
required parts of this application package are not completed and that if all required supporting information and
attachments are not included,this application package will be returned to me as incomplete. I further certify that in
accordance with 15A NCAC 02T.0120(b),the Applicant or any affiliate has not been convicted of environmental crimes,
has not abandoned a wastewater facility without proper closure,does not have an outstanding civil penalty where all
appeals have been abandoned or exhausted, are compliant with any active compliance schedule, and does not have any
overdue annual fees.
I understand that the Division of Water Resources' issuance of the Authorization to Construct Permit may be based
solely upon acceptance of the Licensed Professional Engineer's Certification contained in Section 5, and that the Division
may waive the technical review of the plans, specifications, calculations and other supporting documentation provided
in this application package. I further understand that the application package may be subject to a future audit.
I understand that in accordance with General Statutes 143-215.6A and 143-215.6E any person who knowingly makes
any false statement, representation, or certification in any application package shall be guilty of a Class 2 misdemeanor,
which may include a fine not to exceed $10,000,as well as civil penalties up to$25,000 per violation.
Signature: �-', ��i� Date: 7 !L
THE COMPLETED APPLICATION AND SUPPORTING INFORMATION SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO:
NORTH CAROLINA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENT AND NATURAL RESOURCES
DIVISION OF WATER RESOURCES/NPDES
By U.S. Postal Service By Courier/Special Delivery:
1617 MAIL SERVICE CENTER 512 N. SALISBURY STREET, 9TH FLOOR
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27699-1617 RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27604
TELEPHONE NUMBER: [phone]
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 13

ROY COOPER
� a
Go,wmOr
:yr
MICHAEL S. REGAN.
Secretary
Water Resources S. JAY ZIMMERMAN
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY Llrector
January 26,2017
David Foster
Director of Public Services
PO Box 100
Waynesville,NC 28786
Subject: Final NPDES Permit Renewal
Permit No.NC0025321
Waynesville WWTP
Haywood County
Facility Class IV
SIC 4952
Dear Mr.Foster:
Division personnel have reviewed and approved your application for renewal of the subject permit.
Accordingly, we are forwarding the attached NPDES permit. This permit is issued pursuant to the
requirements of North Carolina General Statute 143-215.1 and the Memorandum of Agreement between
North Carolina and the U.S.Environmental Protection Agency dated October 15,2007(or as subsequently
amended).
On December 9, 2016, a letter was received from Preston Gregg, Town Engineer for the Town of
Waynesville. The letter requested that no changes from the previous permit (except for the eDMR) be
implemented until plant upgrades can be assessed.The Division understands that upgrades at the plant are
necessary and that implementing too many changes can be difficult.The NPDES permit is only reviewed
once every five years and effluent limitations must be reviewed along with implementing any statutory and
administrative revisions that have occurred during that period.
As you recognized the eDMR requirement is required by Federal Regulations and must be implemented.
In addition,the changes in the permit requiring a Mercury Minimization Plan and the need to test mercury
using EPA test method 1631E are required as part of the Statewide Mercury TMDL adopted in 2012,Please
note,as stated below in this letter,a sample MMP was developed through a stakeholder review process and
has been placed on the Division website to help guide the permittees through this requirement.
Furthermore,the requirement to monitor for cyanide is necessary because the reasonable potential analysis
on the effluent at the plant showed that the predicted concentration was greater than 50%of the allowable
discharge limitation. Therefore, monitoring is required to confirm that Water quality standards are not
being exceeded. Since copper and zinc limitations and monitoring requirements have been removed from
the permit this should not affect overall monitoring costs.Lastly,changes to Special Conditions A.(2.)and
A.(3.)were made simply to clarify the requirements. R ECEIVED
Olvisiondmm
011.
MAR 1 0 2 017
State of North Carolina I Environmental Quality I Wald Resources
1617 Mail service Center 1 Raleigh.North Carolina 27699-1617
9197079000 , : _, •, n : ,fir. a ,"

Page 2 of 3
The removal rate was changed to 85%because an evaluation of the average BOD5 and TSS influent and
effluent data for the past two years showed that the treatment facilitywas able to consistentlyachieve it.
However,if the Town can demonstrate the 85%removal rate cannot be met due to less concentrated influent
wastewater or any other reason allowed under 40 CFR 133.103(d),the requirement can be reduced.
As stated previously in the cover letter with the draft permit, the final permit includes the
following changes from your current permit:
• The requirement to begin reporting discharge monitoring data electronically using the NC DWR's
Electronic Discharge Monitoring Report(eDMR)internet application has been added to your NPDES
permit. [See Special Condition A.(5.)]
For information on eDMR,registering for eDMR and obtaining an eDMR user account,please visit the
following web page: http://portal.ncdenr.org/weblwq/admin/bog/ipu/edmr.
For information on EPA's proposed NPDES Electronic Reporting Rule,please visit the following web
site:http://www2.ena.gov/compliance/n osed-ndes-electronic-re ortin -rule.
roP P P g
• A Mercury Minimization Plan(MMP)has been added to your NPDES permit. [See Special Condition
A. (4.)] The permittee shall develop and implement a mercury minimization plan during this permit
term. The MMP shall be developed by August 28, 2017 (within 180 days of the NPDES Permit
Effective Date),and shall be available for inspection on-site. A sample MMP was developed through
a stakeholder review process and has been placed on the Division website for guidance
(http://portal.ncdenr.org/web/wq/swp/ps/npdes,under Model Mercury Minimization Plan).
• A review of effluent BOD5 and TSS influent and effluent data shows the 30-day average percent
removal is greater than 85%.Footnote 143 in section A.(1)has been revised from 75%to 85%to reflect
this improvement.In accordance with 40 CFR 133.103(d), i
The Regional Administrator or, if appropriate, State Director is authorized to
substitute either a lower percent removal requirement or a mass loading limit for the
percent removal requirements set forth in §§ 133.102(a)(3), 133.102(a)(4Xiii),
133.102(b)(3), 102.105(a)(3), 133.105(b)(3) and 133.105(e)(1)(iii) provided that the
permittee satisfactorily demonstrates that: (1) The treatment works is consistently
meeting,or will consistently meet,its permit effluent concentration limits but its percent
removal requirements cannot be met due to less concentrated influent wastewater,(2)to
meet the percent removal requirements, the treatment works would have to achieve
significantly more stringent limitations than would otherwise be required by the
concentration-based standards, and (3) the less concentrated influent wastewater is not
the result of excessive 1/I.The determination of whether the less concentrated wastewater
is the result of excessive VI will use the definition of excessive 1/1 in 40 CFR
35.2005(b)(l6)plus the additional criterion that inflow is nonexcessive if the total flow
to the POTW(i.e., wastewater plus inflow plus infiltration) is less than 275 gallons per
capita per day.
As with previous permits,the Town will need to satisfactorily demonstrate that a lower percent
removal requirement is still appropriate in order to maintain the 75% removal requirement in
the permit.
• Effluent sampling data for copper and zinc showed concentrations were all below detection limits
1 p l�'J�I �g` the penoror Jan. 2012 through Aug. 2016.No limitations and monitoring for copper and zinc
I
1 {

•
Page 3 of 3
are required. The copper and zinc limitations and monitoring requirements have been removed from
the permit renewal.
• Monitoring requirements for cyanide have been added at a monitoring frequency of quarterly.
• Some of the wording has changed in Special Condition A. (2.),Chronic Toxicity Permit Limit,please
review each paragraph carefully.
• Special Condition A.(3.) has been modified to include the specific three years in which the Effluent
Pollutant Scans shall be performed (2018, 2019, and 2020). In addition, at the end of the Special
Condition, 2nd species Toxicity Testing Requirements for municipal permit renewals per Federal
Regulations[40 CFR 122.21(j)(5)1 have been added.
• Please note, that low level effluent mercury data is required for compliance review, therefore, the
Permittee will be required to monitor mercury as part of its effluent pollutants scans,using EPA method
1631 E.
If any parts,measurement frequencies or sampling requirements contained in this permit are unacceptable
to you,you have the right to an adjudicatory hearing upon written request within thirty(30)days following
receipt of this letter. This request must be in the form of a written petition,conforming to Chapter 150B of
the North Carolina General Statutes, and filed with the Office of Administrative Hearings (6714 Mail
Service Center,Raleigh,North Carolina 27699-6714). Unless such demand is made,this decision shall be
final and binding,
Please note that this permit is not transferable except after notice to the Division. The Division may require
modification or revocation and reissuance of the permit. This permit does not affect the legal requirements
to obtain other permits which may be required by the Division of Water Resources or any other Federal,
State, or Local governmental permits that may be required.
If you have questions concerning the draft permit for your facility,please contact Julie Grzyb by email at
julie.grzyb@ncdenr,gov or call at(919)807-6389.
Sincerely
44, ay Zimmerman,P.G.
vector,Division of Water Resources,NCDEQ
Hardcopy: NPDES Files •
Central Files
DWR/Raleigh Regional Office/Water Quality
e-copy: EPA Region IV
Asheville Regional Office/DWR—Water Quality Regional Operations Section
Susan Meadows,Aquatic Toxicity Branch
Maureen Kinney,Wastewater Operator Certification&Training

Permit No. NC0025321
STATE OF NORTH CAROLINA
DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
DIVISION OF WATER RESOURCES
PERMIT
TO DISCHARGE WASTEWATER UNDER THE
NATIONAL POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM
In compliance with the provision of North Carolina General Statute 143-215.1, other lawful
standards and regulations promulgated and adopted by the North Carolina Environmental
Management Commission, and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, the
Town of Waynesville
is hereby authorized to discharge wastewater from a facility located at the
Waynesville Wastewater Treatment Plant
566 Walnut Trail
Waynesville
Haywood County
to receiving waters designated as the Pigeon River in the French Broad River Basin
in accordance with effluent limitations, monitoring requirements, and other conditions set
forth in Parts I, II, III, and IV hereof.
The permit shall become effective March 1, 2017.
This permit and the authorization to discharge shall expire at midnight on January 31, 2021
Signed this day January 26, 2017.
I
- S .y Zimme'w ' .
u sion of Water Resources
By Authority of the Environmental Management Commission

Permit No. NC0025321
SUPPLEMENT TO PERMIT COVER SH
EET
All previous NPDES Permits issued to this facility, whether for operation or discharge are
hereby revoked, and as of this issuance, any previously issued permit bearing this number is no
longer effective. Therefore, the exclusive authority to operate and discharge from this facility
arises under the permit conditions, requirements, terms, and provisions included herein
The Town of Waynesville is hereby authorized to:
1. Continue to operate an existing 6.0 MGD wastewater treatment facility consisting of;
• bar screen
• aerated grit chamber
■ dual primary clarifiers
■ primary lift station
• four aeration basins with coarse air diffusion
• two secondary clarifiers with return sludge
• chlorine contact basin
• two chlorinators
• dechlorination equipment
• instrumented flow measurement
• standby power
• a primary sludge gravity thickener
• a secondary sludge gravity thickener
• a gas mixed floating cover anaerobic digester
• belt filter press and
• sludge stabilization equipment.
This wastewater treatment facility is located at the Waynesville Wastewater Treatment
Plant (566 Walnut Trail, Waynesville) in Haywood County.
2. Discharge wastewater from said treatment works at the location specified on the attached
map into the Pigeon River, which are classified Class C waters in the French Broad River
Basin.
Page 2 of 9

Permit No. NC0025321
PART I.
A (1). EFFLUENT LIMITATIONS AND MONITORING REQUIREMENTS [15A NCAC
02B .0400 et seq., 02B .0500 et seq.]
During the period beginning on the effective date of the permit and lasting until expiration, the
permittee is authorized to discharge from outfall(s) serial number 001. Such discharges shall
be limited and monitored' by the Permittee as specified below:
k[�.Y rrc }.. :T 'K. rt 3'• `3 t 1L 1Y7?���� T3 tiv.".�a='1� f x Y�wi fltb rr4 G., .::.Y..' :' Y. '�'t,Y`�..v
:c6 S fii .-al` T`.5,, n1 </s �Y �."; .i 1 1 1 J L`0 rs y C r >,t ' �JVN
C74.4 I�k.¢� {ei'' 's' f+ili`4't�}' il.� 'F J ..v `' z�` a+�• S.. VIS (��'a �Pf v r �q'�tFF �q J"t:w ' '2F 1�
� h41,4 .,tB>Si ii f 1 (1 m S!u f r l 'ti ! t` ,': W r^S} r 1?I'�_k �CF.S+ Y z:� ! -3 i's" h
S r,�Seati 11 y},< i�: , rl' S LL `�part Y Y :- ,nliia i 4 f; _Ait d /i�{Sk,oa vfli'�nt1ll�r�� F^i'�'We f.,{ a J�y.'M iii. efluk' t v SCt G ", 1
'Y y 1y T 1 i -2 t!� � F g r
j� L!!+ 11 tttf 1 'a.), c 4y� f y* 'y; �y. ,�t +a ;:y exk , 4�} Y ✓,X.f.: t iS +�45 .S;. t" i pY y i ¢.�, r$1, y
,,„ r , � C h�S t'1 13_ 3,� ilAve + r „t i, Avc m .,.,. , ncy Y . �4 l ca -A
l ,�:. ?.,,.fa.le.?!r':xr ,rrr+�ir`1� -.?W.R—r.t ,,,wh y.i<.&.,. ;.,,.,L. ....,v(.va.Gt, ::.+..? .-X7„tT':.d•i•r1 �,..,tL, -1:1? n.ch ,,-,k t
Flow 6.0 MGD Continuous Recording I or E
BOD, 5-day, 20°C3 30.0 mg/L 45.0 mg/L Daily Composite E,I
TSS3 30.0 mg/L 45.0 mg/L Daily Composite E,l
NH3-N (April 1 -October 9.0 mg/L 27.0 mg/L Daily Composite E
31)
NI-13-N (November 1 - 21.0 mg/L 35.0 mg/L Daily Composite E
March 31)
_Dissolved Oxygen Variable2 Grab U,D
Dissolved Oxygen4 Daily Grab E
Fecal Coliform (geometric 200/100 mL 400/100 mL Daily Grab E
mean)
Temperature Variable2 Grab U,D
Temperature Daily Grab E
Total Residual Chlorine5 28 ug/L Daily Grab E
Total Nitrogen _ Quarterly Composite E
Total Phosphorus Quarterly Composite E
Chronic Toxicity6 Quarterly Composite E
Cyanide? Quarterly Grab E
pH8 Daily Grab E
Mercury Minimization
Plan9
Notes:
1. The permittee shall submit Discharge Monitoring Reports electronically using NC DWR's eDMR
application system. See Special Conditions A. (5).
2. Sample locations: E - Effluent, I - Influent, U - Upstream at River Mile 55.5, D- Downstream at River
Mile 53.5 Instream monitoring shall be grab samples taken 3/wk (Jun-Sep) and 1/wk (Oct-May).
3. The monthly average effluent BOD5 and Total Suspended Solids concentrations shall not exceed 15%
of the respective influent value (85%removal).
4. The daily average dissolved oxygen effluent concentration shall not be less than 6.0 mg/L.
5. Limitation applies only if chlorine is added for disinfection. The facility shall report all effluent TRC
values reported by a NC certified laboratory including field certified. However, effluent values below
50 ug/L will be treated as zero for compliance purposes.
6. Chronic Toxicity (Ceriodaphnial, P/F, 9%; February, May, August, and November; See Part A. (2).
7. The Division shall consider all cyanide values reported below 10 pg/L to be"zero"for compliance
purposes. However, Discharge Monitoring Reports (DMRs) shall record all values reported by a North
Carolina-certified laboratory (even if these values fall below 10 ug/L).
8. The pH shall not be less than 6.0 standard units nor greater than 9.0 standard units.
9. A Mercury Minimization Plan (MMP) is now required. See Special Condition A. (4).
There shall be no discharge of floating solids or visible foam in other than trace amounts,
Page 3 of 9
,

Permit No. NC0025321
A. {2) CHRONIC TOXICITY PERMIT LIMIT {Quarterly) [15A NCAC 02B .0200 et seq.]
CHRONIC TOXICITY PERMIT LIMIT (QUARTERLY)
The effluent discharge shall at no time exhibit observable inhibition of reproduction or
significant mortality to Ceriodaphnia dubia at an effluent concentration of 9%.
The permit holder shall perform at a minimum, quarterly monitoring using test procedures
outlined in the "North Carolina Ceriodaphnia Chronic Effluent Bioassay Procedure," Revised
December 2010, or subsequent versions or "North Carolina Phase II Chronic Whole Effluent
Toxicity Test Procedure" (Revised- December 2010) or subsequent versions. The tests will be
performed during the months of February, May, August, and November. These months signify
the first month of each three-month toxicity testing quarter assigned to the facility. Effluent
sampling for this testing must be obtained during representative effluent discharge and shall be
performed at the NPDES permitted final effluent discharge below all treatment processes.
If the test procedure performed as the first test of any single quarter results in a failure
or ChV below the permit limit, then multiple-concentration testing shall be performed at
a minimum, in each of the two following months as described in "North Carolina Phase II
Chronic Whole Effluent Toxicity Test Procedure" (Revised-December 2010) or subsequent
versions.
All toxicity testing results required as part of this permit condition will be entered on the
Effluent Discharge Monitoring Form (MR-1) for the months in which tests were performed,
using the parameter code TGP3B for the pass/fail results and THP3B for the Chronic Value.
Additionally, DWR Form AT-3 (original) is to be sent to the following address:
Attention: North Carolina Division of Water Resources
Water Sciences Section/Aquatic Toxicology Branch
1621 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, NC 27699-1621
Completed Aquatic Toxicity Test Forms shall be filed with the Water Sciences Section no later
than 30 days after the end of the reporting period for which the report is made.
Test data shall be complete, accurate, include all supporting chemical/physical measurements
and all concentration/response data, and be certified by laboratory supervisor and ORC or
approved designate signature. Total residual chlorine of the effluent toxicity sample must be
measured and reported if chlorine is employed for disinfection of the waste stream.
Should there be no discharge of flow from the facility during a month in which toxicity
monitoring is required, the permittee will complete the information located at the top of the
aquatic toxicity (AT) test form indicating the facility name, permit number, pipe number,
county, and the month/year of the report with the notation of"No Flow"in the comment area of
the form. The report shall be submitted to the Water Sciences Section at the address cited
above.
Should the permittee fail to monitor during a month in which toxicity monitoring is required,
monitoring will be required during the following month. Assessment of toxicity compliance is
based on the toxicity testing quarter, which is the three-month time interval that begins on the
first day of the month in which toxicity testing is required by this permit and continues until
the final day of the third month.
Should any test data from this monitoring requirement or tests performed by the North Carolina
Division of Water Resources indicate potential impacts to the receiving stream, this permit may
be re-opened and modified to include alternate monitoring requirements or limits.
Page 4 of 9

• Permit No. NC0025321
NOTE: Failure to achieve test conditions as specified in the cited document, such as minimum
control organism survival, minimum control organism reproduction, and appropriate
environmental controls, shall constitute an invalid test and will require immediate follow-up
testing to be completed no later than the last day of the month following the month of the initial
monitoring.
A. (3) EFFLUENT POLLUTANT SCAN (Municipal POTWs) [G.S. 143-215.1(b)]
The Permittee shall perform a total of three (3) Effluent Pollutant Scans for all parameters listed
below. One scan must be performed in each of the following years: 2018, 2019, and 2020.
Analytical methods shall be in accordance with 40 CFR Part 136 and shall be sufficiently
sensitive to determine whether parameters are present in concentrations greater than
applicable standards and criteria. Samples should be collected with one quarterly toxicity test
each year, and must represent seasonal variation [i.e., do not sample in the same quarter every
year]. Unless otherwise indicated, metals shall be analyzed as "total recoverable."
Ammonia(es N) C0610 1,2-dlchloroethane 32103 Bis(2chloroethoxy)methane 34278
Chlorine(total residual,TRC) 50063 Trans-1,2-dlchloroethylene 34546 Bis(2chloroethyl)ether 34273
Dissolved oxygen 00300 1,1-dichloroethylene 34501 Bis(2-chlarolsopropy1)ether 34283
Nitrate 00620 1,2-dichloropropane 34541 Bis(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate 39100
Nitrite 00615 1,3-dlchloropropylene 77163 4-bromophenyl phenyl ether 34636
KJeldahl nitrogen 00625 Ethyibenzene 34371 Butyl benzyl phthalate 34292
Oland grease 00556 Methyl bromide 34413 2-chlorcnaphthalene 34581
Phosphorus C0665 Methyl chloride 34418 4-chlorophenyl phenyl ether 34641
Total dissolved solids 70295 Methylene chloride 34423 Chrysene 34320
Hardness 00900 1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane 81549 Di-n-butyl phthalate 39110
Antimony 01097 Tetrachioroethylene 34475 DI-n-octyl phthalate 34596
Arsen c 01002 Toluene 34010 Dibenzo(a,h)anthracene 34556
Beryllium 01012 1,1,1-trichioroethane 34506 1,2-dichlorobenzente 34536
Cadmium 01027 1,1,2-trlchioroelhane 34511 1,3-dichlorobenzene 34566
Chromiurn 01034 Tdch'aroethyiene 39180 1,4-d chlorobenzene 34571
Copper Vinyl chloride 39175 33-dichlorobenzidine 34631
lead 01051 Acid-extractable compounds: Diethyl phthalate 34336
Mercury(Method 1631E) COMER Pchtoro.m-creso 34452 Dimethyl phtha'ate 34341
Nickel 01067 2-chlorophenol 34586 2,4-dInitrotcluene 34611
Selenium 01147 2,4-dlchiorophenol 34601 2,6-dlnllrotoluera C0626
Silver 01077 2,4-dirnethylphenol 34606 1,2•diphenylhydrazine 34346
Thallium 01059 4,6-dinitro-ocresol 34657 Fluoranthene C0376
Zinc 01092 2,4-dinlirophenol 34616 Fluorene 34381
Cyanide 00720 2-nitrophenol 34591 Hexachlorobenzene C0700
Total phenolic compounds 32730 4-nitrophenol 34646 Hexachlorobuladiene 39702
Volatile organic compounds: Pentachlorophenol 39032 Hexachlorocyclo-pentadiene 34386
Acrotein 34210 Phenol 34694 Hexachloroethane 34396
Acryonitrite 34215 2 s,6-trichlorophenol 34621 Indeno(1,2,3-cd)pyrene 34403
Benzene 34030 Hasa-neutref compounds: Isophorone 34408
Brornoform 32104 Acenaphthene 34205 Naphthalene 34696
Carbon tetrachloride 32102 Acenaphthylene 34200 Nilrobenzene 34447
Chlorcbenzene 34301 Anthracene CO220 N-nitrosodl-n-propylamine 34428
Chlorodlbromomethans 34306 Benzidine 39120 N-nitrosodimethylamine 34438
Chloroethane 85811 Benzo(a)anthracene 34526 N-nitrosodiphanylamine 34433
2chloroeihyl vinyl ether 34576 Benzo(a)pyrene 34247 Phenanthrene 34461
Chloroform 32106 3,4 benzofluoranthene 34230 Pyrene 34469
Dlchlorobromomethane 32101 Benzo(ghi)perylene • 34521 1,2,4-trlchiorobenzene 34551
1,1-dichloroeihane 34496 Benzo(k)fluoranthene 34242
Page 5 of 9

Permit No. NC0025321
Reporting. Test results shall be reported electronically via eDMR or on DWR Form- DMR-PPA-
1 (or on a form approved by the Director) by December 31st of each designated sampling year.
The report shall be submitted to the following address:
NC DEQ / DWR / Central Files, 1617 Mail Service Center, Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-
1617.
Additional Toxicity Testing Requirements for Municipal Permit Renewal. Please note that
Municipal facilities that are subject to the Effluent Pollutant Scan requirements listed above are
also subject to additional toxicity testing requirements specified in Federal Regulation 40 CFR
122.21(j)(5) and EPA Municipal Application Form 2A. The US EPA requires four (4) toxicity
tests for a test organism other than the test species currently required in this permit. The
second species tests should be conducted either quarterly for a 12-month period prior to
submittal of the permit renewal application, or four tests performed at least annually in the four
and one half year period prior to the application. The second species tests must be multiple
concentration (5 concentrations plus the control). These tests shall be performed for acute or
chronic toxicity, whichever is specified in this permit. POTWs performing NPDES chronic
Ceriodaphnia testing should perform chronic Fathead minnow testing. POTWs performing
NPDES acute Fathead Minnow testing should perform acute Ceriodaphnia testing. POTWs
performing NPDES chronic Mysid shrimp testing should perform chronic Silverside Minnow
testing.
The second species toxicity test results shall be filed with the Aquatic Toxicology Branch at the
following address:
North Carolina Division of Water Resources
Water Sciences Section/Aquatic Toxicology Branch
1621 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1621
Contact the Division's Aquatic Toxicology Branch at 919-743-8401 for guidance on conducting
the additional toxicity tests and reporting requirements. Results should also be summarized in
Part E (Toxicity Testing Data) of EPA Municipal Application Form 2A, when submitting the
permit renewal application to the NPDES Permitting Unit.
A. (4) MERCURY MINIMIZATION PLAN (MMP) (G.S. 143-215.1 (b)]
The permittee shall develop and implement a mercury minimization plan during this permit
term. The MMP shall be developed by August 28, 2017 (within 180 days of the NPDES Permit
Effective Date), and shall be available for inspection on-site. A sample MMP was developed
through a stakeholder review process and has been placed on the Division website for guidance
(http://portal.ncdenr.org/web/wcg/swpJps/npdes, under Model Mercury Minimization Plan).
The MMP should place emphasis on identification of mercury contributors and goals for
reduction. Results shall be summarized and submitted with the next permit renewal.
Performance of the Mercury Minimization Plan will meet the requirements of the TMDL (Total
Maximum Daily Load) for mercury approved by USEPA on October 12, 2012, unless and until a
Waste Load Allocation specific to this facility is developed and this NPDES permit is amended to
require further actions to address the Waste Load Allocation.
Page 6 of 9

Permit No. NC0025321
A. (5) ELECTRONIC REPORTING OF MONITORING REPORTS [G.S. 143-215.1(b))
Federal regulations require electronic submittal of all discharge monitoring reports (DMRs) and
program reports. The final NPDES Electronic Reporting Rule was adopted and became effective
on December 21, 2015.
NOTE: This special condition supplements or supersedes the following sections within Part II of
this permit (Standard Conditions for NPDES Permits):
• Section B. (11.) Signatory Requirements
• Section D. (2.) Reporting
• Section D. (6.) Records Retention
• Section E. (5.) Monitoring Reports
1. Reporting Requirements [Supersedes Section D. (2.) and Section E. (5.) (all
The permittee shall report discharge monitoring data electronically using the NC DWR's
Electronic Discharge Monitoring Report (eDMR) internet application.
Monitoring results obtained during the previous month(s) shall be summarized for each
month and submitted electronically using eDMR. The eDMR system allows permitted
facilities to enter monitoring data and submit DMRs electronically using the internet. Until
such time that the state's eDMR application is compliant with EPA's Cross-Media Electronic
Reporting Regulation (CROMERR), permittees will be required to submit all discharge
monitoring data to the state electronically using eDMR and will be required to complete the
eDMR submission by printing, signing, and submitting one signed original and a copy of the
computer printed eDMR to the following address:
NC DEQ / Division of Water Resources / Water Quality Permitting Section
ATTENTION: Central Files
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1617
If a permittee is unable to use the eDMR system due to a demonstrated hardship or due to
the facility being physically located in an area where less than 10 percent of the households
have broadband access, then a temporary waiver from the NPDES electronic reporting
requirements may be granted and discharge monitoring data may be submitted on paper
DMR forms (MR 1, 1.1, 2, 3) or alternative forms approved by the Director. Duplicate signed
copies shall be submitted to the mailing address above. See "How to Request a Waiver from
Electronic Reporting" section below.
Regardless of the submission method, the first DMR is due on the last day of the month
following the issuance of the permit or in the case of a new facility, on the last day of the
month following the commencement of discharge.
Starting on December 21, 2020, the permittee must electronically report the following
compliance monitoring data and reports, when applicable:
• Sewer Overflow/Bypass Event Reports;
• Pretreatment Program Annual Reports; and
• Clean Water Act (CWA) Section 316(b) Annual Reports.
The permittee may seek an electronic reporting waiver from the Division (see "How to
Request a Waiver from Electronic Reporting" section below). •
Page 7 of 9

Permit No. NC0025321
2. Electronic Submissions
In accordance with 40 CFR 122.41(1)(9), the permittee must identify the initial recipient at
the time of each electronic submission. The permittee should use the EPA's website
resources to identify the initial recipient for the electronic submission.
Initial recipient of electronic NPDES information from NPDES-regulated facilities means the
entity (EPA or the state authorized by EPA to implement the NPDES program) that is the
designated entity for receiving electronic NPDES data [see 40 CFR 127.2(b)].
EPA plans to establish a website that will also link to the appropriate electronic reporting
tool for each type of electronic submission and for each state. Instructions on how to access
and use the appropriate electronic reporting tool will be available as well. Information on
EPA's NPDES Electronic Reporting Rule is found at:
http://www2.epa.gov/compliance/final-national-pollutant-discharge-elimination-system-
npdes-electronic-reporting-rule.
Electronic submissions must start by the dates listed in the "Reporting Requirements"
section above.
3. How to Request a Waiver from Electronic Reporting
The permittee may seek a temporary electronic reporting waiver from the Division. To obtain
an electronic reporting waiver, a permittee must first submit an electronic reporting waiver
request to the Division. Requests for temporary electronic reporting waivers must be
submitted in writing to the Division for written approval at least sixty (60) days prior to the
date the facility would be required under this permit to begin submitting monitoring data
and reports. The duration of a temporary waiver shall not exceed 5 years and shall,
thereupon expire. At such time, monitoring data and reports shall be submitted
electronically to the Division unless the permittee re-applies for and is granted a new
temporary electronic reporting waiver by the Division. Approved electronic reporting waivers
are not transferrable. Only permittees with an approved reporting waiver request may
submit monitoring data and reports on paper to the Division for the period that the
approved reporting waiver request is effective.
Information on eDMR and the application for a temporary electronic reporting waiver are
found on the following web page:
http:I/deq.nc.gov/about/divisions/water-resources/edmr
4. Signatory Requirements [Supplements Section B. 111.) (b) and Supersedes Section B.
(11.)(d)I
All eDMRs submitted to the permit issuing authority shall be signed by a person described
in Part II, Section B. (11.)(a) or by a duly authorized representative of that person as
described in Part II, Section B. (11.)(b). A person, and not a position, must be delegated
signatory authority for eDMR reporting purposes.
For eDMR submissions, the person signing and submitting the DMR must obtain an eDMR
user account and login credentials to access the eDMR system. For more information on
North Carolina's eDMR system, registering for eDMR and obtaining an eDMR user account,
please visit the following web page:
Page 8 of 9

Permit No. NC0025321
http://deq.nc.gov/about/divisions/water-resources/edmr
Certification. Any person submitting an electronic DMR using the state's eDMR system
shall make the following certification [40 CFR 122.22]. NO OTHER STATEMENTS OF
CERTIFICATION WILL BE ACCEPTED:
'1 certify, under penalty of law, that this document and all attachments were prepared under
my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified
personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the
person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering
the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief true,
accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false
information, including the possibility of fines and imprisonment for knowing violations,"
5. Records Retention [Supplements Section D. (6.11
The permittee shall retain records of all Discharge Monitoring Reports, including eDMR
submissions. These records or copies shall be maintained for a period of at least 3 years
from the date of the report. This period may be extended by request of the Director at any
time [40 CFR 122.41].
Page 9 of 9

•
I), -tN-w,iivi".AC„,..4116!"- - --..z-1
' -4--rei,--'•-.41,,,,F:fdritil-A :5\ .-It'c---• 74-,r4(01........-- 4-0:111WW tdis,1--- -- ,:___ -- -./t-- -'''=---?iel
,'')? -ii,„,..--,, ,,,,, ,..,,,,.'40,),..,... ) /,. ,,,‘• - "--,,, _-.t,,,,...-1.-keo--4.„.„--fra_lt:::‘,7...:1,-, , ,,,:, 1 iitr(r,,..E.,,, ,..1.7:7
,, .: „por- .,,.. ,71.1 •,`.‘
de '1 4:-., :/c
i 14,4 "01$1. 411k._ A. / 9,40,4;:i'r, ''ililti *cL 11166,1%,.N: '
,, 1, t.,,,. ., • i '1 if (..%-,.;:,C„.i. -' '', •r Ag.:•-1-
7, • . Vair% -•-r,t,..="."... ..1 -,V:rjazere;e03. : tr ,INA,
({51k- ilod.iillOciro ,. 4,,,..... ":42----.. 1 : • r--,,,,,--tyz)14. k,,,.... ., 1)..i),. %. ,fr.;,., . T.%. ‘;'‘..-;',N".4..',,ts: ','•',.*'
•-v' 0,''"'',11' 1,1i1.• •4 I 61 411.:4' 1'' 1 1 3/44 fiftli 1' ' (PI;?,..'. '•-.
ik If e5
,. ,,t) • 011 r,,A,' ''',e)\..f4.,.14 I.i :IV'. V25' 7.'.°..___ i.'.''''''r,'J . ,k-,41,,,:1,P.5•:-;-.=si•,to ,-..ANI,'- %,''
-s ze• • •••••=0.• , ,
v,s,k '1/4.,'•`41z, 4k0-1-10:1--- 74: .4 :-//Ai le , . ., 1.,,k ,. ItN\ , ,:el 7,4C.!_,',..,,,,'.ii li. ' .`: ,.,4 1,..>, , :\ 1411114, or,c`. 1 t•:*;^':`,:',,, Aiwisoor,,0:4;) ).. v,...t4, 1, 4.. ..,,,,, , c.,%x ,..„,..7,/,..,.. .:. x,,,m ., „.411,!,i ..
, .. , , \'zi, I, ,,.;,- I A, PA".4. •
,, ..--stsviii,fro. Ni?" A i- /pc.... -L._ '44 ; A 1 '•,. '‘. ,--.-• 17''irif4F1 . 'g'6-4:"*4 : 1. 1.=
‘\\.:..:''''4,,Rt ,3•- • ) 4 , ) i i).; ) '" ( ...,.. ... /Fr* '',-• 4'1..'4"../vii.gel, J74.7 1 0 w I 1044,0
''''''',„„,',q-,;' ''' A •,,, ‘%.10,1,b• gitCP'Y . . ) , ' _,•••••)•"' " , l''''.,. - .141 "1 tekp,..771„:,1 '' .., 41/4
.0*. .'4\4r. \a.v. 1)\ iii '•° '-;,;) ,
. , ..r.
,p..,,, ._, ,,...c.--- \--,,. \ k - ,_alrat-t•—_,,...., , • , , '• — ,,-,,ti.A
k - k
, -. "7-...,.. 10 .,. ''700-4,. • - - . -
e, • --, .. ..\ . -.A - ,., y:‘, .;, 30
4.0.---- ./) , - „0/ „, •%_,____ - , ., I, '„,,ejJ
kAk V1S±m P.W.6tat)tii,V;11 .".-ilir".'...etirAr'.i id. .', ',' ' ! • )
c.
4-s___,'%L.:4 1 1. .*,,r1/15-A-- -: 1 —Z,A- •:44-....0V,, tit-A-1-0,,,_ A) • 1. A:t ' ,o.t.' .4 ii''''''..,,,,Ne., IIII
r''''k7-W•;{` ,,* r.,-,.-.,.,,,j‘ ......... , -0Th.,,x--7.-1-, . OW--.' :;'''''''''''"--,- Z '' •'1 1 ii4 11 I
5.1.4.4.1,41,k;
... • - .llt.. ... . '''',.....,,.17"- -1111., 'N.. :•• liSii 1 X di : .
-N"-x.z..L.Ntf,,,, it't-,,..., r- 41,41,,..2. -3,-,-...1........,.. .•4_...-----•• nRN-, - -- - --, • ,4/ '''.7.4. 4 V.', le
,,A,T,L1,'`I,.,,,,,,v., 1 j" .•,. -.,,,i4 k rp. --a4) P d• 1 IA :* .t.. /ktiotiiit. ,Avii,
Niii:::)--.,-ii .,,,,v/ ,,,•-•-`,,.,,,,,;. c. ;"1,..,,,r.,
" Nril.,S-11.F,1 ''''''.6.1'/. ?.. ), -.I74.... fie,r;:.•ti„.X.11--,_jil• -s,. .
1110.4 j -;---**•:._1
,,,,.....:.L.,44,4 if'. ;.)firpLe---.,.. ' . .•1).16.(6-f,....1:\Vi'll(?el-Ajr74-- - : i ; I,/,7.- • .• *.fi,k;i117
' `Ili, . •••1
r '&. I A s: •,...,, . -.,..\,....,:
s — • •
... ,• . , 1.
j' i.16'‹ V! ,:jilinV'A r arr r.121 fl'\4j .1'4 $
;‘,.<?' •cSe.\\w,l;4,,7,...orm tir i ,,.,v 11-- ...•• ','• - 34 .e , . Oil ,rvt- ., A, 1 4 ., 1
. , , . , •.(,1,7,:j, ..1.. • 4 , ,... .ivil., .., , __,..7.,,,.._. .1:..--. IY • ' -: '11".."
. -, \i_toc - -4----4,- 1 , ,IlltIk•
* A' „401.1,•zik't! ),114NtIg. .1..4.; . k
lk.%• ' ; '
•T;
\ .., ,,„
, ,,c-,, ., ,„,
,i V: •, ' -,.......kes . •-') ; v fir
w. ''i.' '" . gMa . , i
" l'' l'--jk:7-.',--sa..---,, . • 'Z'.1."'\ ja' ;" ''';'..'''''''$.' '• ** -11k;.' .....)31r. '"; 1(li
11"
,,, • ''''. 2 -41
li5
\ • , . ! • .. VO
e
aN.._‘ ..:•_. .-.;., .1,1rite:1,1,-;:.Eij.,,a i
'••:'1:,',,i, ,_i•_Am..</).
til.4x.k.117,,.,Ki ;.NAgt.0..4. , t.ii ; '.•‘'•'-.L j. 1...• -2" ?- - • , ...14.54Ali:••vt•,.t
' c rrY,',,) 740, tfer /
rink
.. ,. _
.z.', .. 9,1,Ui..,..,,
..4:^i' i !;.'41/
tf
•-_ -<4:1,,• It. dor-
....44te ) ,.." , • .„ '," i'Pr.---0:110,' '''''" ..,-- i. i q,' - c,_,,...!,.„, .,,.4r,,„„ . ..,.-'
" .0", ii?4,,/./: iiipt41-,,,,,••- :1::". ..V.1:-. _ k i, - . , 41431IT'- '• di 4111111N. jAveg-taiblig,,, Amor 1
';'..-''.2 :-! 44,..... ‘-• '' v/e4;- ,Ttle +4,1A- •.V_''''t,•-... i' ,at --.. Ph'• ,41111r".-,1-=-7:4 - , r kir---_... ,---,-,,„_.z...._- _._ Ami...e....:
..,_. -:,.,-.:-:- .,.-""'... ,:ffig:r.--. --1;.";;`•:...7:4'., I'444reer..1:-* .1...."Ms'.• V'ri,V"•,.4.,'.'l'13:;.*1.,4((Win?-10:':i','n''. ' f)*. '- „if, ' ,.-...--.-.
40.t.' A, , ,..
1
"6" .-.ip • '-• . • '0/0.-., ::,..is .", .rv',.: '..! ,4:, .4. -.cest-(V 1-",k,'",;-'-,',..::--.-. - 1'i ( f( \ ..,,,..
-4.. .if614 .4 0.7.___.___..,Th4..,,..04... ,:. ...,...;z4ii,,10,1,,i-4.C's !!:::,'`t-Fi• ;-- , N. - • -:*1) t ek .'- . ." ! '• - ,.
0 vovp, ,trii.„. ..7 * 187 ri
x. s, „. • .. . ., ...- . -...1. __.„,... •. ii . . , ••• .,. .1 VW -11:1*„
. .*.. ,,,0,4i 4, ,.eito..
. >,)---4ett* ,.4.031',:;,..,:"1'4."-.•'.‘ r:--gililyNt9b.-.n.9v- I?' I Ali"- --- V - - - I (1 l'• 7' ''
/4.,1' t,ei.'',/•;<-..i:.'",i. '.', ''il Witlf,-,T'°44.01..‘'1
'-'''./,• ' 'ft..,-*•'. .,. ..,,,,,1 4t,:,- ;.;: .... .,-....„,,,A, .,(....-,,,„ . , t „. ---- . •
( ...,,
j, Ili\
[,,,,, • .:, • _•.— • -). -...„-..,..4. : . . _,
, ,......1,. ,/,..1 . , , , . g-. _:,._ ___„, ,• ,,,t,, __.
..t.... ii• Ig: ...,..,z,-* ' ,,:,,,. .,...^, h - -*: , .
.-- /;••.1.• 1 Fai . : m ,... ---------7
5,
. .
NC0025321 - Town of Waynesville WWTP Facility 414dillIF
Latitude: 35°33'02" Sub-Basin/MX: 04-03-05/06010105LI Location
Longitude: 82°56'58" County: Haywood
Ouad#: E7SW/Clyde,NC
Stream Class: C
Town of Waynesville
Receiving Stream: Pigeon River • North NC0025321
Permitted Flow: 6.0 MGT) Map not to scale Waynemilie WWTP

PAT MCCRORY
DONALD R. VAN DER VAART
Secretary
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL OUALITY S. JAY ZIMMERMAN
[hrecmr
July 20,2016
MICHAEL J.MORGAN-TOWN MANAGER
TOWN OF WAYNESVILLE
POST OFFICE BOX 100
WAYNESVILLE,NORTH CAROLINA 28786
Subject: Permit No. WQ0013116
Town of Waynesville Class A
Distribution Program
Distribution of Class A Residuals
Haywood County
Dear Mr. Morgan:
In accordance with your permit renewal request received February 5, 2016, and subsequent
additional information received May 16, 2016, we are forwarding herewith Permit No. WQ0013116 dated
July 20,2016,to the Town of Waynesville for the continued operation of the subject residuals management
program.
This permit shall be effective from the date of issuance until June 30, 2021, shall void Permit No.
WQ0013 116, and shall be subject to the conditions and limitations as specified therein. Please pay
particular attention to the monitoring requirements listed in Attachment A for they may differ from the
previous permit issuance. Failure to establish an adequate system for collecting and maintaining the
required operational information shall result in future compliance problems.
Please note the following permit conditions are new since the last permit issuance dated
January 26,2007:
➢ Condition I11.4.-This condition requires copies of the permit and the O&M Plan to be present
whenever bulk residuals are applied.
➢ Condition 1I1.5.- This condition requires spill control provisions to be maintained in transport
and application vehicles during residual application events.
➢ Condition I11.7.-This condition requires that a suitable vegetative cover be established on all
bulk application areas.
> Condition 11I.9.-This condition requires the existence of a Utilization Agreement between the
Permittee and the entity receiving the bulk residuals.
➢ Condition 111.10.-This condition lists the minimal requirements for a Utilization Agreement.
> Condition II1.13. - This condition prohibits distributing residuals to anyone known to be
applying residuals contrary to the conditions of the Utilization Agreement.
State of North Carolina I Environmental Quality I Water Resources I Water Quality Pennitting I Non-Discharge Permitting
1617 Mail Service Center Raleigh,North Carolina 27699-I617
919 807 6464

Mr.Michael J.Morgan
July 20,2016
Page 2 of 2
> Condition VI.7. — This condition prohibits the expansion of the facility under certain
circumstances.
If any parts, requirements or limitations contained in this permit are unacceptable, the Permittee
has the right to request an adjudicatory hearing upon written request within 30 days following receipt of
this permit. This request shall be in the form of a written petition,conforming to Chapter 150B of the North
Carolina General Statutes, and filed with the Office of Administrative Hearings at 6714 Mail Service
Center,Raleigh,NC 27699-6714. Unless such demands are made,this permit shall be final and binding.
If you need additional information concerning this permit, please contact David Goodrich at(919)
807-6352 or [e-mail].
Sincerely,
uS.Jay Zimmerman,P.G.,Director
Division of Water Resources
cc: Haywood County Health Department(Electronic Copy)
Asheville Regional Office,Water Quality Regional Operations Section(Electronic Copy)
Beth Buffington—Protection and Enforcement Branch(Electronic Copy)
Digital Permit Archive(Electronic Copy)
Central Files

NORTH CAROLINA
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT COMMISSION
DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
RALEIGH
DISTRIBUTION OF CLASS A RESIDUALS PERMIT
In accordance with the provisions of Article 21 of Chapter 143,General Statutes of North Carolina as
amended,and other applicable Laws,Rules,and Regulations
PERMISSION IS HEREBY GRANTED TO
Town of Waynesville
Haywood County
FOR THE
continued operation of a residuals management program for the Town of Waynesville and consisting of the
distribution of Class A residuals generated by the approved facility listed in Attachment A with no discharge
of wastes to surface waters, pursuant to the application received February 5, 2016, and subsequent
additional information received by the Division of Water Resources, and in conformity with other
supporting data subsequently filed and approved by the Department of Environmental Quality and
considered a part of this permit. The use and disposal of residuals are regulated under Title 40 Code of
Federal Regulations Part 503. This permit does not exempt the Permittee from complying with the federal
regulations.
This permit shall be effective from the date of issuance until June 30, 2021, shall void Permit No.
WQ0013116 issued January 26, 2007, and shall be subject to the following specified conditions and
limitations:
SCHEDULES
1. No later than six months prior to the expiration of this permit, the Permittee shall request renewal of
this permit on official Division forms. Upon receipt of the request, the Division will review the
adequacy of the facilities described therein,and if warranted,will renew the permit for such period of
time and under such conditions and limitations as it may deem appropriate. Please note Rule 15A
NCAC 02T.0105(d)requires an updated site map to be submitted with the permit renewal application.
[15A NCAC 02T.0108(b)(2),02T.0105(d),02T.0109]
II. PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
1. The subject residuals management program shall be effectively maintained and operated at all times so
there is no discharge to surface waters, nor any contravention of groundwater or surface water
standards. In the event the facilities fail to perform satisfactorily, including the creation of prolonged
nuisance conditions due to improper operation and maintenance,the Permittee shall immediately cease
distribution of residuals, contact the Asheville regional office supervisor, and take any immediate
corrective actions. [G.S. 143-215.1]
WQ0013116 Version 4.0 Shell Version 160201 Page 1 of 11

2. This permit shall not relieve the Permitee of responsibilityfor damages to groundwater or surfac
e
water resulting from the operation of this residuals management program. [15A NCAC 02B .0200,
02L.0100]
3. Only residuals generated by the facilities listed in Attachment A are approved for distribution in
accordance with this permit. [G.S. 143-215.1]
4. Pollutant concentrations in residuals distributed or applied to any land application site shall not exceed
the following Ceiling Concentrations or Monthly Average Concentrations(i.e.,dry weight basis):
Ceiling Concentration Monthly Average
Parameter (milligrams per kilogram) Concentration
(milligrams per kilogram)
Arsenic 75 41
Cadmium 85 39
Copper 4,300 1,500
Lead 840 300
Mercury 57 17
Molybdenum 75 n/a
Nickel 420 420
Selenium 100 100
Zinc 7,500 2,800
[I 5A NCAC 02T.1105]
5. Residuals that are distributed shall meet Class A pathogen reduction requirements in 15A NCAC 02T
.1106(a)and(b). Exceptions to this requirement shall be specified in Attachment A. [15A NCAC 02T
.1106]
6. Biological residuals (i.e. residuals generated during the treatment of domestic or animal processing
wastewater, or the biological treatment of industrial wastewater, and as identified in Attachment A)
that are distributed shall meet one of the vector attraction reduction alternatives in 15A NCAC 02T
.1107(a). Exceptions to this requirement shall be specified in Attachment A. [15A NCAC 02T.1107]
7. Setbacks for treatment and storage facilities shall be as follows:
Setback Description Setback
(feet)
Habitable residence or place of public assembly under separate ownership or not 100
to be maintained as part of the project site
Property lines 50
Private or public water supply 100
Surface waters(streams—intermittent and perennial,perennial waterbodies,and J0
wetlands)
Wells with exception to monitoring wells 100
[15A NCAC 02T.1108]
WQ0013 116 Version 4.0 Shell Version 160201 Page 2 of 11

8. Setbacks for Class A land applied bulk residuals shall be as follows:
Setback by residual type
Setback Description (feet)
Liquid Cake
Private or public water supply 100 100
Surface waters(streams—intermittent and perennial, 100 25
__perennial waterbodies,and wetlands)
Surface water diversions(ephemeral streams,
waterways, ditches) 25 0
Groundwater lowering ditches(where the bottom of 25 0
the ditch intersects the SHWT)
Wells with exception to monitoring wells 100 100
Bedrock outcrops 25 0
1 Unless otherwise noted in Attachment A, "cake" residuals are those that have greater than 15%
solids by weight and can be stacked without flowing, as well as can be handled, transported and
spread as a solid (e.g., using a backhoe, front end loader, slinger spreader, broadcast spreader or
other equipment designed for handling solid materials) without leaving any significant liquid
fraction behind.
[15A NCAC 02T.1108]
9. Bulk residuals and other sources of Plant Available Nitrogen(PAN)shall not be applied in exceedance
of agronomic rates. Appropriate agronomic rates shall be calculated using expected nitrogen
requirements based on the determined Realistic Yield Expectations(RYE)using any of the following
methods:
a. Division's pre-approved site specific historical data for specific crop or soil types by calculating
the mean of the best three yields of the last five consecutive crop harvests for each field.
b. North Carolina Historical Data for specific crop and soil types as provided by North Carolina State
University Department of Soil Science (http://nutrients.soil.ncsu.edu/yields/index.php). A copy
shall be kept on file and reprinted every five years in accordance with Condition IV.6.
c. If the RYE cannot be determined using methods (a)or(b)above, the Permittee may use the RYE
and appropriate nutrient application rates reported in any of the following documents:
i. Crop management plan as outlined by the local Cooperative Extension Office, the North
Carolina Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services, the Natural Resource
Conservation Service,or other agronomist.
ii. Waste Utilization Plan as outlined by the Senate Bill 1217 Interagency Group - Guidance
Document: Chapter 1
(http://www.ncagr.gov/SWC/techldocuments/9th Guidance Doc 100109.pdf).
iii. Certified Nutrient Management Plan as outlined by the Natural Resources Conservation
Services (NRCS). These plans must meet the USDA-NRCS 590 Nutrient Management
Standards(ftp://ftp-fc.sc.egov.usda.gov/NHQ/practice-standards/standards/590.pdf).
d. If the RYE and appropriate nutrient application rates cannot be determined, the Permittee shall
contact the Division to determine necessary action.
[15A NCAC 02T .1109(b)(1)(k)]
WQ0013116 Version 4.0 Shell Version 160201 Page 3 of 1 I

10. The Permittee shall not distribute Class A residuals that have a sodium adsorption ratio(SAR)of 10 or
higher without prior written Division approval. The Permittee may seek approval by demonstrating
that the entity accepting the residuals is: aware of the effects of a high SAR content; has agreed on
proper residual application rates; and has agreed to operational considerations to ensure that the high
SAR content will not adversely impact the receiving sites. Recommendations regarding sodium
application rate,soil amendments(e.g.,gypsum,etc.)or a mechanism for maintaining site integrity and
conditions conducive to crop growth,can be obtained from the local Cooperative Extension Office,the
Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services,the Natural Resource Conservation Service,a North
Carolina Licensed Soil Scientist,or an agronomist. [15A NCAC 02T.0108(b)(1)]
III. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
1. The residuals management program shall be properly maintained and operated at all times. The
program shall be effectively maintained and operated as a non-discharge system to prevent any
contravention of surface water or groundwater standards. [15A NCAC 02T.1110]
2. The Permittee shall maintain an approved Operation and Maintenance Plan(O&M Plan)Modifications
to the O&M Plan shall be approved by the Division prior to utilization of the new plan.The O&M Plan,
at the minimum, shall include:
a. Operational functions;
b. Maintenance schedules;
c. Safety measures;
d. Spill response plan;
e. Inspection plan including the following information:
i. Names and/or titles of personnel responsible for conducting the inspections;
ii. Frequency and location of inspections, including those to be conducted by the ORC, and
procedures to assure that the selected location(s) and inspection frequency are representative
of the residuals management program;
iii. Detailed description of inspection procedures including record keeping and actions to be taken
by the inspector in the event that noncompliance is observed pursuant to the noncompliance
notification requirements under the monitoring and reporting section of the permit;
f. Sampling and monitoring plan including the following information:
i. Names and/or titles of personnel responsible for conducting the sampling and monitoring;
ii. Detailed description of monitoring procedures including parameters to be monitored;
iii. Sampling frequency and procedures to assure that representative samples are being collected.
Fluctuation in temperature, flow, and other operating conditions can affect the quality of the
residuals gathered during a particular sampling event.The sampling plan shall account for any
foreseen fluctuations in residuals quality and indicate the most limiting times for residuals to
meet pathogen and vector attraction reduction requirements (e.g. facilities that land apply
multiple times per year but have an annual sampling frequency, may need to sample during
winter months when pathogen reduction is most likely to be negatively affected by cold
temperatures).
[15A NCAC 02T.1100]
WQ0013116 Version 4.0 Shell Version 160201 Page 4 of 11

3. Upon the Water Pollution Control System Operators Certification Commission's (WPCSOCC)
classification of the facility,the Permittee shall designate and employ a certified operator in responsible
charge (ORC) and one or more certified operators as back-up ORCs in accordance with 15A NCAC
08G.0201.The ORC or his back-up shall visit the facilities in accordance with 15A NCAC 08G.0204,
or as specified in the most recently approved O&M plan (i.e., see Condition III.2.), and shall comply
with all other conditions of 15A NCAC 08G.0204. For more information regarding classification and
designation requirements,please contact the Division of Water Resources'Protection and Enforcement
Branch at(919)707-9105. [1 SA NCAC 02T .0117]
4. When the Permittee land applies bulk residuals,a copy of this permit and a copy of O&M Plan shall be
maintained at the land application sites during land application activities. [15A NCAC 02T
.0108(b)(1)]
5. When the Permittee transports or land applies bulk residuals, the spill control provisions shall be
maintained in all residuals transport and application vehicles. [15A NCAC 02T.1110]
6. When the Permittee land applies bulk residuals, adequate measures shall be taken to prevent wind
erosion and surface runoff from conveying residuals from the land application sites onto adjacent
properties or into surface waters. [G.S. 143-215.1]
7. When the Permittee land applies bulk residuals,a suitable vegetative cover shall be maintained on land
application sites onto which residuals are applied, or application shall be in accordance with the crop
management plan outlined by the local Cooperative Extension Office, the Department of Agriculture
and Consumer Services,the Natural Resource Conservation Service,or an agronomist and as approved
by the Division. [15A NCAC 02T .1109(b)(1)]
8. Bulk residuals shall not be land applied under the following conditions:
a. If the residuals are likely to adversely affect a threatened or endangered species listed under section
4 of the Endangered Species Act or its designated critical habitat;
b. If the application causes prolonged nuisance conditions;
c. If the land fails to assimilate the bulk residuals or the application causes the contravention of surface
water or groundwater standards;
d. If the land is flooded,frozen or snow-covered,or is otherwise in a condition such that runoff of the
residuals would occur;
e. Within the 100-year flood elevation,unless the bulk residuals are injected or incorporated within a
24-hour period following a residuals land application event;
f. During a measurable precipitation event(i.e., greater than 0.01 inch per hour), or within 24 hours
following a rainfall event of 0.5 inches or greater in a 24-hour period;
g. If the slope is greater than 10% for surface applied liquid residuals, or if the slope is greater than
18%for injected or incorporated bulk liquid residuals;
h. If the soil pH is not maintained at 6.0 or greater,unless sufficient amounts of lime are applied to
achieve a final soil pH of at least 6.0, or if an agronomist provides information indicating that the
pH of the soil,residuals and lime mixture is suitable for the specified crop. Any approved variations
to the acceptable soil pH(6.0)will be noted in this permit;
i. If the land does not have an established vegetative cover unless the residuals are incorporated or
injected within a 24-hour period following a residuals land application event. Any field that is in a
USDA no-till program shall be exempted from meeting this vegetative cover requirement;
j. If the vertical separation between the seasonal high water table and the depth of residuals
application is less than one foot;
k. If the vertical separation of bedrock and the depth of residuals application is less than one foot;
WQ0013116 Version 4.0 Shell Version 160201 Page 5 of 11

1. Application exceeds agronomic rates.
[I S A NCAC 02T.1109]
9. A dated Utilization Agreement between the Permittee, his subcontractor distributing and applying the
residuals,and the entity agreeing to accept Class A bulk residuals shall be in place prior to distribution
of the bulk residuals. The agreement shall specify the subcontractors and the agreeing entity's
responsibilities. The Permittee, the subcontractor, and the entity accepting the Class A bulk residuals
shall sign the Utilization Agreement. The Utilization Agreement shall have a clause allowing the
recipient of the residuals to end the Utilization Agreement at any time by notifying the Permittee in
writing. If the recipient of the residuals sells the property,the Utilization Agreement shall automatically
terminate. If the permit is rescinded, the Utilization Agreement shall automatically terminate. The
duration of the Utilization Agreement shall be one to which the Permittee, the subcontractor, and the
recipient of the residuals agree. Any changes in the agreement that are necessitated by changes in the
permit shall be mailed to the subcontractor and the recipient of the residuals by certified mail with
return receipt. The Permittee shall keep these records on file for inspection by the Division for each
Utilization Agreement while that Utilization Agreement is in force. [15A NCAC 02T.0108(b)(1),02T
.1104]
10. At a minimum,the Utilization Agreement shall stipulate the following:
a. By agreeing to accept the bulk Class A residuals, it is recognized that the application of these
residuals is allowed under the conditions of this agreement including the prohibitions contained in
Condition 111.8. Land application of Class A residuals is considered the beneficial reuse of a waste
under 15A NCAC 02T .1100, and has been deemed permitted under 15A NCAC 02T .1103(4)
provided the conditions of this agreement are met.Any action resulting in damages to surface water
or groundwater,caused by failure to follow the conditions of this agreement,is subject to Division
enforcement action;
b. The person or entity accepting the bulk Class A residuals shall to the best of his knowledge meet
the following application requirements:
i. Class A biological residuals shall not be stockpiled for more than 30 days(after the delivery of
the last load) prior to land application unless the permittee notifies the Asheville Regional
Office and receives approval to exceed the 60 day limit. At a minimum, the information
provided shall be the location,the date that the last load was delivered,the quantity of residuals
stockpiled, the percent solids of the residuals stockpiled, measures taken to prevent stockpile
runoff(e.g. placement, perimeter berms, etc.) and the anticipated date the residuals will be
spread.;
ii. Application of bulk residuals shall not occur within 100 feet of a public or private water supply
source;
iii. Application of bulk residuals shall not occur within 100 feet of any well,with the exception of
Division approved monitoring wells;
iv. Application of bulk residuals shall not occur within 25 feet of surface waters.
c. The generator of the Class A bulk residuals shall provide information on the proper use of the
residuals, including information on the nutrient quantities within the residuals and recommended
application rates. A copy of the label or information sheet attached to bags or other containers,as
specified in the labeling requirements under Condition III.12., is sufficient;
d. The applicator or party accepting bulk residuals from the Permittee shall supply all third parties
receiving bulk residuals with documentation specifying that application shall occur consistent with
the utilization agreement;
e. Instructions,including contact information for key personnel,shall be provided to the applicator or
party receiving bulk residuals in the event that any requirements specified in the utilization
agreement are not met.
WQ0013116 Version 4.0 Shell Version 160201 Page 6 of 11

f. A copy of the Utilization Agreement shall be maintained at the land application sites when bulk
residuals are being applied.
[15A NCAC 02T.0108(b)(1),02T .1104]
11. All residuals shall be adequately stored to prevent untreated leachate runoff.The finished product may
be placed on a concrete pad, placed under shelter or physically covered until it is distributed to the
buyer. If an alternate storage site is used, approval must be obtained from the Division. [15A NCAC
02T.0108(b)(1)]
12. A label shall be affixed to the bag or other container in which residuals are sold or given away for land
application,or an information sheet shall be provided to the person who receives Class A residuals. At
a minimum,the label or information sheet shall contain the following:
a. The name and address of the person who prepared the residuals;
b. A statement that residual land application is prohibited except in accordance with the instructions
on the label or information sheet;
c. A statement identifying that this material shall be prevented from entering any public or private
water supply source(including wells)and any surface water(e.g.,stream,lake,river,wetland,etc.);
d. A statement that the residuals shall be applied at agronomic rates and recommended rates for its
intended use.
[15A NCAC 02T .1109(a)]
13. The Permittee shall not distribute bulk residuals to any person or entity known to be applying residuals
contrary to the condition of the signed Utilization Agreement. The Permittee shall report to the
Asheville Regional Office as per reporting conditions under Condition IV.8.any person or entity known
to be applying residuals contrary to the condition of the signed Utilization Agreement. [15A NCAC
02T .1103(a)]
WQ0013116 Version 4.0 Shell Version 160201 Page 7 of 11

IV. MONITORING AND REPORTING REQUIREMENTS
1. Any Division required monitoring(including groundwater,plant tissue,soil and surface water analyses)
necessary to ensure groundwater and surface water protection shall be established, and an acceptable
sample reporting schedule shall be followed. [15A NCAC 02T.0108(c)]
2. Residuals shall be analyzed to demonstrate they are non-hazardous under the Resource Conservation
and Recovery Act(RCRA). Residuals that tests or is classified as a hazardous or toxic waste
under 40 CFR Part 261 shall not be used or disposed under this permit. The analyses
[corrosivity,ignitability,reactivity,and toxicity characteristic leaching procedure(TCLP)] shall
be performed at the frequency specified in Attachment A,and the Permittee shall maintain these results
for a minimum of five years. Any exceptions from the requirements in this condition shall be specified
in Attachment A.
The TCLP analysis shall include the following parameters(the regulatory level in milligrams per liter
is in parentheses):
Arsenic(5.0) 1,4-Dichlorobenzene(7.5) Nitrobenzene(2.0)
Barium(100.0) 1,2-Dichloroethane(0.5) Pentachlorophenol(100.0)
Benzene(0.5) 1,1-Dichloroethylene(0.7) Pyridine(5.0)
Cadmium(1.0) 2,4-Dinitrotoluene(0.13) Selenium(1.0)
Carbon tetrachloride(0.5) Endrin(0.02) Silver(5.0)
Chlordane(0.03) Hexachlorobenzene(0.13) Tetrachloroethylene(0.7)
Chlorobenzene(100.0) Heptachlor(and its hydroxide) Toxaphene(0.5)
(0.008)
Chloroform(6.0) Hexachloro-1,3-butadiene(0.5) Trichloroethylene(0.5)
Chromium(5.0) Hexachloroethane(3.0) 2,4,5-Trichlorophenol(400.0)
m-Cresol(200.0) Lead(5.0) 2,4,6-Trichlorophenol(2.0)
o-Cresol(200.0) Lindane(0.4) 2,4,5-TP(Silvex)(1.0)
p-Cresol(200.0) Mercury(0.2) Vinyl chloride(0.2)
Cresol(200.0) Methoxychlor(10.0)
2,4-D(10.0) Methyl ethyl ketone(200.0)
Once the residuals have been monitored for two years at the frequency specified in Attachment A,the
Permittee may submit a permit modification request to reduce the frequency of this monitoring
requirement. In no case shall the monitoring frequency be less than once per permit cycle.
[15A NCAC 13A .0102(b),02T.1101,02T.1105]
WQ0013 116 Version 4.0 Shell Version 160201 Page 8 of 11

3. An analysis shall be conducted on the Class A residuals at the frequency specified in Attachment A,
and the Permittee shall maintain the results for a minimum of five years. The analysis shall include the
following parameters:
Aluminum Mercury Potassium
Ammonia-Nitrogen Molybdenum Selenium
Arsenic Nickel Sodium
Cadmium Nitrate-Nitrite Nitrogen Sodium Adsorption Ratio
(SAR)
Calcium Percent Total Solids TKN
Copper pH Zinc
Lead Phosphorus
Magnesium Plant Available Nitrogen
(by calculation)
[15A NCAC 02T.1101]
4. Residuals shall be monitored for compliance with pathogen and vector attraction reduction
requirements at the frequency specified in Attachment A, and at the time indicated in the sampling and
monitoring sections of the approved O&M plan.The required data shall be specific to the stabilization
process utilized, and sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the Class A pathogen reduction
requirements in 15A NCAC 02T .1106(a)and(b),and one vector attraction reduction requirement in
15A NCAC 02T .1107 (a) shall be met. Any exceptions from the requirements in this condition shall
be specified in Attachment A. [15A NCAC 02T .1106,02T.1107,02T .1111(c)]
5. Laboratory parameter analyses shall be performed on the residuals as they are distributed,and shall be
in accordance with the monitoring requirements in 15A NCAC 02B .0505. [15A NCAC 02B .0505]
6. The Permittee shall maintain records tracking all bulk residual distribution or land application events
performed by the Permittee. At a minimum,these records shall include the following:
a. Source of residuals;
b. Date of distribution/land application;
c. Name and address of recipient of residuals;
d. Volume of residuals distributed to each recipient;
e. Intended use of residuals;
f. If land application events performed by the Permittee-Nitrogen Application Rate based on RYEs
(if using data obtained from the North Carolina State University Department of Soil Science
Website,the printout page shall be kept on file and reprinted every five years).
[15A NCAC 02T.0109(a)]
7. Three copies of an annual report shall be submitted on or before March 151. The annual report shall
meet the requirements described in the Instructions for Residuals Application Annual Reporting Forms.
Instructions for reporting and annual report forms are available at
http://portal.ncdenr.org/web/wq/aps/lau/reporting, or can be obtained by contacting the Land
Application Unit directly. The annual report shall be submitted to the following address:
Division of Water Resources
Information Processing Unit
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh,North Carolina 27699-1617
WQ0013116 Version 4.0 Shell Version 160201 Page 9 of 11

[15A NCAC 02T.1111(a)]
8. Noncompliance Notification
The Permittee shall report by telephone to the Asheville Regional Office,telephone number(828)296-
4500, as soon as possible,but in no case more than 24 hours or on the next working day following the
occurrence or first knowledge of the occurrence of any of the following:
a. Distribution of residuals abnormal in quantity or characteristic.
b. Any failure of the distribution program resulting in a release of material to surface waters.
c. Any time self-monitoring indicates the facility has gone out of compliance with its permit
limitations.
d. Any process unit failure, due to known or unknown reasons, rendering the facility incapable of
adequate residual treatment.
e. Any spill or discharge from a vehicle or piping system during residuals transportation.
Any emergency requiring immediate reporting(e.g.,discharges to surface waters,imminent failure of
a storage structure,etc.)outside normal business hours shall be reported to the Division's Emergency
Response personnel at telephone number(800)662-7956,[phone],or(919)733-3300.Persons
reporting such occurrences by telephone shall also file a written report in letter form within five days
following first knowledge of the occurrence. This report shall outline the actions taken or proposed to
be taken to ensure that the problem does not recur. [15A NCAC 02T.0105(1), 02T .0108(b)(1)]
V. INSPECTIONS
1. The Permittee shall provide adequate inspection and maintenance to ensure proper operation of the
subject facilities and shall be in accordance with the approved O&M Plan. [15A NCAC 02T.0108(b)]
2. Prior to each bulk residuals distribution event,the Permittee or his designee shall inspect the residuals
storage,transport and application facilities to prevent malfunctions,facility deterioration and operator
errors resulting in discharges, which may cause the release of wastes to the environment, a threat to
human health or a public nuisance. The Permittee shall maintain an inspection log that includes,at a
minimum, the date and time of inspection, observations made, and any maintenance, repairs, or
corrective actions taken. The Permittee shall maintain this inspection log for a period of five years
from the date of inspection, and this log shall be made available to the Division upon request. [15A
NCAC 02T.0108(b)]
3. Any duly authorized Division representative may, upon presentation of credentials, enter and inspect
any property, premises or place on or related to the land application sites or facilities permitted herein
at any reasonable time for the purpose of determining compliance with this permit;may inspect or copy
any records required to be maintained under the terms and conditions of this permit; and may collect
groundwater, surface water or leachate samples. [G.S. 143-215.3(a)(2)]
VI. GENERAL CONDITIONS
1. Failure to comply with the conditions and limitations contained herein may subject the Permittee to an
enforcement action by the Division in accordance with North Carolina General Statutes 143-215.6A to
143-215.6C. [G.S. 143-215.6A to 143-215.6C]
2. This permit shall become voidable if the residuals land application events are not carried out in
accordance with the conditions of this permit. [15A NCAC 02T.0110]
3. This permit is effective only with respect to the nature and volume of residuals described in the permit
application and other supporting documentation. [G.S. 143-215.1]
WQ0013116 Version 4.0 Shell Version 160201 Page 10 of 11

• 4. The issuance of this permit does not exempt the Permittee from complying with any and all statutes,
rules, regulations, or ordinances, which may be imposed by other jurisdictional government agencies
(e.g.,local,state,and federal). Of particular concern to the Division are applicable river buffer rules in
15A NCAC 02B .0200; erosion and sedimentation control requirements in 15A NCAC Chapter 4 and
under the Division's General Permit NCG010000;any requirements pertaining to wetlands under 15A
NCAC 02B .0200 and 02H .0500; and documentation of compliance with Article 21 Part 6 of Chapter
143 of the General Statutes. [15A NCAC 02T .0105(c)(6)]
5. In the event the residuals program changes ownership or the Permittee changes his name, a formal
permit modification request shall be submitted to the Division. This request shall be made on official
Division forms, and shall include appropriate documentation from the parties involved and other
supporting documentation as necessary. The Permittee of record shall remain fully responsible for
maintaining and operating the residuals program permitted herein until a permit is issued to the new
owner. [15A NCAC 02T .0104]
6. This permit is subject to revocation or unilateral modification upon 60-day notice from the Division
Director,in whole or part for the requirements listed in 15A NCAC 02T.0110. [15A NCAC 02T.0110]
7. Unless the Division Director grants a variance,expansion of the permitted residuals program contained
herein shall not be granted if the Permittee exemplifies any of the criteria in 15A NCAC 02T.0120(b).
[15A NCAC 02T.0120]
8. The Permittee shall pay the annual fee within 30 days after being billed by the Division. Failure to pay
the annual fee accordingly shall be cause for the Division to revoke this permit. [15A NCAC 02T
.0105(e)(3)]
Permit issued this the 20th day of July 2016
NORTH CAROLINA ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT COMMISSION
FJay Zimmerman, P.G.,Director
---Division of Water Resources
By Authority of the Environmental Management Commission
Permit Number WQ0013116
WQ0013116 Version 4.0 Shell Version 160201 Page 11 of 11

ATTACHMENT A-Approved Residual Sources Certification Date:July 20,2016 ,
Town of Waynesville Permit Number: WQ0013116 Version: 4.0
Class A Residuals Product Generated for Distribution
Approved
Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Mineralization
Maximum Frequency for Rate
Owner Facility Name County Permit Biological DryTons Frequency for Frequency for Pathogen&
Number Residuals Non-hazardous Metals and
g [Raw=0.4;
Per Year Characteristics 2 Nutrients 3>s Vector Attraction Aerobic=0.3;
Reductions 4'S Anaerobic=0.2;
Compost=0.1]
Town of Waynesville Town of Waynesville WWTP6 Haywood NC0025321 Yes 1,065 Annually See Table Below See Table Below 0.2
Total 1,065
1. Maximum Dry Tons per Year is the amount of residuals approved for distribution from each permitted facility.
2. Analyses to demonstrate that residuals are non-hazardous(i.e.,TCLP,ignitability,reactivity,and corrosivity)as stipulated under permit Condition IV.2.
3. Testing of metals and nutrients as stipulated under permit Condition IV.3.
4. Analyses of pathogen and vector attraction reductions as stipulated under permit Condition IV.4.
5. Monitoring frequencies are based on the actual dry tons applied per year using the table below,unless specified above.
IDry Tons Generated Monitoring Frequency
(short tons per year) (Established in 40 CFR 503 and 15A NCAC 02T.1111)
<319 I/Year
=>319-<1,650 1/Quarter(4 times per year)
=>1,650-<16,500 1/60 Days(6 times per year)
=>16,500 I/month(12 times per year)
6. No residuals other than those generated by this residuals source generating facility shall be approved for acceptance for treatment in the residuals composting facility in accordance with this permit.
If no land application events occur during a required sampling period(e.g.no land applications occur during an entire year when annual monitoring is required),then no
sampling data is required during the period of inactivity.The annual report shall include an explanation for missing sampling data.Those required to submit the annual
report to EPA may be required to make up the missed sampling,contact the EPA for additional information and clarification.
WQ0013116 Version 4.0 Attachment A Page 1 of 1

a "1•,' \Y,.`f f-'�..4^ .Tc' ! .4,y--\ V 4/11f �'__,„ ...b.' \-J pi•
. n MK:I"at, , V✓_
,,,r..).0:•.rl1/,zu,>, ..t ��',�'w./ ''/•/`//—:�'.".:."' s�":)4,4 r Y Vw1• .�f,�, `Ta-�_ ••/._\� ,iv �`,
a �,.,r^J_fil,ef/1 s • ` ! W;• _ .1': `` \".,-=:V• .`�-, .r$X+
1/w.. l {y s.-• f / '. 4.rr� +- it.,- -.-1 �';•'t( t #,1 ft { r: i..r
J r ,' 1}' ram//( } C
i 3+ I r. �����.
+ `• .+Ml �~• �ti. r- C `k `' y. �„a ,,,i'`� r ` • i,"$ac.c, '"+_ ,_•.•i `..'-r`.y't i ..
is-
- - .� t, -r�....r.2 ... (! Y \ -,rc7 r ,,.. A•c� t H Px'i
1� 4 41- a.&2 ..� . � N�; ,}r i S1 •YLr_ .�I� �,V ✓ �+ �r� �` r *re".'. t _i
'�"•'. y+ 9 r F1•e j� 1/A'�;/ r: .. * F
'ems +r -.'� , q /R f.- ,-. '1,\,; A./Lk 7\;j (�7/ • 4\1 • '4
r . [ f r' '7 f ( 'C';,,':„ ), ,, , ' ��li ,r, ay 6 ���� V 1��� ( 1 �
•
1:14:1.1 .".I.0,4 k -• ...0- i 4 f '' s ...--`4
. Or 4 1 / -- - --'\''4. i2 \I — --`t,--;.',',T,-;,: 'f''', lof- ,,,...1:1;111'4 7:.:1 .-,
• — - . .„.... .-. i ..,,,,„.:.- .\ . ..-e„.„ - I,. - .1.--,..,
1 '1'_ . .r t� 1
S f .F,a, s:: :S !�', .ol �cr.,�--^yCb4.tJ\ \` ,j! } =5 1` /r
Ni*
-J r"'- r. w S!t! '�,t!/•+ �` �•.J •} Z ry' JjJ,6•R o mile ff .-",:w. ,l • i �,
S'•
_.,,,t/A-\\,) , %.,01 • Alt-----e,— ,, !...Ce---N, \ ‘‘,41Ar„,'"i —..--,;., -.;;;,,Si . t4,--.,..y. --:,
tr ` / ALL i
- JJ 1 �_ /
ti r s ,ilj
rcla. _.': o'-,,e'-'- filPeN.k f 1 r" i. f )5,„. 4 Of
' ;'
1 v 1 Jr.• , L.'Ili; ' it. --.1,4 •; , ' p 3 , ‘._J '
't .1 • cam' 'I y: /•A•. * w �: iuo '', _ `� \ *ty _-.1 = . i
'1,•' t .•-•-1 t\*`•N Iv$,. 4. .' . - 4„ ',...} r -.,•,'.. "„.i,i,1 I I rim.q,rgt..
tt 0,
„,;.s,: %t,,,' iLIU
...43
� r tg,L cam•_, 4--7.1�7'..-
11
U.
,..,:k _.......___,
„�!j 3 .13(.r f_____, c1
- ~rf j;`a ' 4,• i `r\ NFy,'1 � t� 1� t
W Ifs
/ a: , i. %'�^ • , -� l `fir +• �" �—' r!
\ r r , ;�J;AGii, . 1 t^ `-� ��: /A'x
`4g`+" �F.; t _• • .�-:4jxa'', :. F i:. A. .'S"-. c A .))1a,
• .f��
-��•s�;,,.,,,,.,:e., ,�: - '•. j f� /� , c ' _-' . 67
t •.,401.
,r`
'00025321 - Town of Waynesville WWTP ir
FIGURE 1
TOWN OF WAYNESVILLE
Uuitude; 35°33'02" $ub-Basin, 04-03-05 DISTRIBUTION OF CLASS A WASTEWATER RESIDUALS
Longitude: 82456'S8, County' liaywood HAYWOOD COUNTY
Quad#; E7SW/Clyde,NC
prearn Cfuss, C WQ0013116
IReceiving Stream; Pigeon River LOCATION OF PRODUCT GENERATING FACILITY
,Perna ned Flow, 6.0 MG) Mop not to scale

NORTH CAROLINA
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT COMMISSION
COUNTY OF HAYWOOD
IN THE MATTER OF )
NORTH CAROLINA ) SPECIAL ORDER BY CONSENT
NPDES PERMIT NC0025321 )
HELD BY ) EMC SOC WQ S 19-005
TOWN OF WAYNESVILLE )
)
Pursuant to provisions of North Carolina General Statutes(G.S.) 143-215.2 and 143-215.67,this Special
Order by Consent is entered into by the Town of Waynesville,hereinafter referred to as the Town,and
the North Carolina Environmental Management Commission,an agency of the State of North Carolina
created by G.S. 143B-282, and hereinafter referred to as the Commission:
1. The Town and the Commission hereby stipulate the following:
(a) The Town holds North Carolina NPDES permit NC0025321 for operation of the Town of
Waynesville wastewater treatment plant(WWTP) and for making an outlet therefrom for the
discharge of treated wastewater to the Pigeon River,currently classified C waters of this State
in the French Broad River Basin. The Town is unable to consistently comply with effluent
limitations for Total Suspended Solids (TSS) and fecal coliform as set forth in NPDES Permit
NC0025321. Compliance will require preparation of plans and specifications for construction
and operation of an upgraded WWTP and continued reduction of inflow and infiltration(I&I)
within the collection system.
(b) Noncompliance with final effluent limits constitutes causing and contributing to pollution of
the waters of this State named above,and the Town is within the jurisdiction of the
Commission as set forth in G.S. Chapter 143,Article 21.
(c) The Town has secured funding for the planning, design and construction of improvements to
the current WWTP,which includes upgrade of the headworks,removal of primary clarifiers
and replacement with primary drum filters,rehabilitation of the current aeration basins,
installation of two new circular secondary clarifiers, improvements in solids management,
conversion of the anaerobic digester to an aerated sludge holding tank and conversion from gas
to liquid disinfection. Completion of the project will provide the Town with the ability to
adequately treat incoming wastewater,properly manage solids and aid the facility in returning
to compliance with NPDES Permit No.NC0025321.
(d) Since this Special Order is by Consent, neither party will file a petition for a contested case or
for judicial review concerning its terms.
2. The Town,desiring to comply with the permit identified in paragraph 1(a)above,hereby agrees to
do the following:
(a) The Town has outstanding civil penalty assessments for NPDES permit NC0025321 that total
$20,645.48.The Town has violations that have not been assessed by the Division to-date that
approximate$22,500.As settlement of all violations,including those assessed and pending,the

SOC WQ S19-005
Town agrees to pay an upfront penalty of$4,129.00, with the remaining amount of$16,516.48
to be held in abeyance until the successful completion of this SOC. Upon the succ
essful
completion of this SOC, the remainingpenaltyamount held in abeyance ($16,516.48 assessed)
p
will be remitted in full and the assessment of pending violations waived. Should the Special
Order of Consent not reach successful conclusion,the full remaining assessed penalty of
$16,516.48 will be due immediately by check payable to the North Carolina Department of
Environmental Quality and forwarded to the Director. The Division retains the right to address
those violations not assessed approximating $22,500 if the SOC is not successfully completed.
(b) Undertake the following activities in accordance with the indicated time schedule:
(1) Within 60 days,following the issuance of the SOC, submit an update on current I&I
reduction efforts and a copy of the Town's current collection system CIP.
(2) On or before April 15,2021,submit approvable plans for an Authorization to Construct.
(3) On or before November 1,2020,submit and/or make available online the flow
measurements obtained from the meter installed downstream of the intermediate pump
station.
(4) Four(4) months following issuance of the AtoC, advertise project, receive bids&receive
authority to award for the construction of plant improvements
(5) Three (3) months following receipt of authority to award the construction contract, begin
construction of the plant improvements as outlined in the AtoC.
(6) Twenty-four(24) months after beginning construction, complete construction of the
Waynesville WWTP improvements.
(7) Three(3) months following completion of construction, achieve compliance with the
NPDES Permit NC0025321.
(8) Provide quarterly progress reports summarizing activities undertaken by the Town
regarding the construction of the WWTP. Reports will also provide a summary of the
performance of the Town's existing WWTP during the previous quarter, and detail efforts
made to optimize the WWTP during that time.
(9) Provide semi-annual progress reports on the Town's concurrent efforts to address and
remove significant sources of 1&1. Additionally,updated copies of the Town's CS CIP
shall be submitted as they become available. Reports may be provided by hard copy or
electronic means and shall be received by the NC DEQ Asheville Regional Office and the
DWR Central Office no later than the 10th day following the end of the quarter during the
period of time the Order is in effect.
(c) During the time in which this Special Order by Consent is effective, comply with the interim
Page 2 of 5

SOC WQ S 19-005
effluent limitations contained in Attachment A. Under this Special Order of Consent, only the
parameters listed below have been modified from the most current NPDES Permit in effect.
The following reflects only the limitations that have been modified from NPDES requirements by
this Order:
Current Permit Limits Modified Limits(SOC)
Parameter Units Monthly Average Weekly Average Monthly Average Weekly Average
Total Suspended mg/L 30 45 45 100
Solids(TSS)
Fecal Coliform mg/L 200 400 200 600
(d) No later than thirty(30)calendar days after any date identified for accomplishment of any
activity listed in paragraph 2. (b)(1)—(7) above,submit to the Director of DWR a written
notice of compliance (including the date compliance was achieved along with supporting
documentation if applicable)or noncompliance therewith. In the case of noncompliance,the
notice shall include a statement of the reason(s)for noncompliance,remedial action(s)taken,
and a statement identifying the extent to which subsequent dates or times for accomplishment
of listed activities may be affected.
3. The Town agrees that unless excused under paragraph four(4),the Town will pay the Director of
DWR, by check payable to the North Carolina Department of Environmental Quality, stipulated
penalties according to the following schedule for failure to meet the deadlines set out in paragraph 2.
- j
SOC Violation Stipulated Penalty
Failure to meet a schedule date listed in paragraphs $1000 per missed schedule date within the first
2.(b)(1)through 2.(b)(6). seven(7)days of tardiness;$750 per day thereafter._
Failure to submit progress reports as required by $1000 for the first violation; penalty doubles with
paragraph 2,(b)(7&8). each subsequent assessment for late reports.
Failure to maintain compliance with any modified limit $1000 for exceeding monthly average limit;$500 for
contained in the SOC. exceeding weekly average limits.,
Monitoring frequency violations for modified parameters $100.00 per omitted value per parameter
4. The Town and the Commission agree that the stipulated penalties are not due if the Town satisfies
DWR that noncompliance was caused solely by:
(a) An act of God;
(b) An act of war;
(c) An intentional act or omission of a third party, but this defense shall not be available if the act
or omission is that of an employee or agent of the defendant or if the act or omission occurs in
connection with a contractual relationship with the permittee;
(d) An extraordinary event beyond the permittee's control. Contractor delays or failure to obtain
Page 3 of 5

SOC WQ S 19-005
funding will not be considered as events beyond the permittee's control;or
(e) Any combination of the above causes.
Failure within thirty(30)days of receipt of written demand to pay the penalties,or challenge them
by a contested case petition pursuant to G.S. 150B-23,will be grounds for a collection action,which
the Attorney General is hereby authorized to initiate. The only issue in such an action will be
whether the thirty(30)days has elapsed.
5. This Special Order by Consent and any terms and/or conditions contained herein,hereby supersede
any and all previous Special Orders,Enforcement Compliance Schedule Letters,terms,conditions,
and limits contained therein issued in connection with NPDES permit NC0025321.
6. Failure to meet the schedule dates identified in section 2 may terminate this Special Order by
Consent and require the Town to comply with the terms and conditions contained in permit
NC0025321.
7. Noncompliance with the terms of this Special Order by Consent is subject to enforcement action in
addition to the above stipulated penalties, including injunctive relief pursuant to G.S. 143-215.6.C.
8. In accordance with the provisions of G.S. 143-215.67(b)the Commission allows the Town of
Waynesville to accept the additional waste specified below to its waste disposal system.The
approval of additional flow will be in the form of an issued sewer extension permit.
Project Gallons per
Day
Total Projected Nevi Flow OieeTeiifl oI``S 155,000 :i
to.Provide'Minimum.: opable Service ..w._,
Total 155,000
8. The permittee,unon signature of this Special Order by Consent,will be expected to comply
• with all schedule dates,terms,and conditions of this document.
9. This Special Order by Consent shall expire July 1,2024.
•
Page 4 of 5

SOC WQ S 19-005
For the Town of Waynesville:
ob Hites Date
Town Manager
For the North Carolina Environmental Management Commission
12/31/2020
Date
Director,Division of Water Resources
1
1
Page 5 of 5

DESIGN CALCULATIONS
TOWN OF WAYNESVILLE
SLUDGE STORAGE TANK IMPROVEMENTS
HAYWOOD COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA
kA
mcgill
Shaping
Communities
Together
55 Broad Street
Asheville NC, 28801
828-252-0575
0AR
Firm License No.: C-0459 S*").00ESS/0 14::r%
050993
U?ZZ'
JULY 2021 �'�'GINO-
��''ON 9 HE4��•�.
PROJECT NO. 19.00305

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SLUDGE HOLDING TANK DESIGN
Town of Waynesville Page 2 Design Calculations
Aerated Sludge Holding Tank Conversion July 2021

SECTION 1 HOLDING TANK DESIGN
Sludge Holding Tank Volume
design solids concentration 3.00%
1475• tank diameter 60 ft
• top of footing 2511.16 ft
aon, top of wall 2537.66
• high water level 2534.50 ft
a cone pitch (rise over run) 0.17 ft/ft
3 height of cylinder 23.34 ft
lc height of cone 5 ft
v 70,705 ft3
volume
ea
528,871 gal
sludge storage capacity* 6.9 days
* Liquid sludge storage capacity does not meet the 30 days minimum. The covered sludge storage
shed can store approximately 3 months of dewatered cake.
Sludge Handling Aeration Requirements
Sludge Holding Tank
Description Units NOTES
Number 1
Effective Volume 528,871 gal
Effective Volume 70,705 ft3
Mixing Requirements 30 scfm/1000ft3 Ten States Standards
Blower Size 2121 scfm
23.3 ft
Side Water Depth
10.10 psi
Pipe Headloss+Diffuser
Headloss 2.3 psi Headloss+ Filter
Headloss+Safety Factor
0.8+1+0.25+0.25=2.3 psi
Blower Discharge Pressure 12.4 psi
Blower Efficiency 60%
Estimated Blower Horsepower 191 horsepower
Selected Blower Horsepower 200 horsepower
Town of Waynesville Page 3 Design Calculations
Aerated Sludge Holding Tank Conversion July 2021

s
Residuals Management Plan
Town of Waynesville Wastewater Treatment Plant
The project generally includes improvements to the Town of Waynesville's Wastewater Treatment
Plant (WWTP), which has a capacity of 6 million gallons per day (MGD). The existing sludge
processes include two primary sludge pumps, two waste sludge pumps, a primary sludge gravity
thickener, a secondary sludge gravity thickener, aerobic sludge holding tank, multiple sludge
transfer pumps, a belt filter press, RDP Class A lime stabilization system, and a sludge loading
station. Although the Town of Waynesville has a permit WA0013116 for distribution of Class A
residuals,the Town currently hauls biosolids to White Oaks Landfill in Haywood County until the
Town is able to identify new clients to accept the Class A sludge.
Trash, Sediment and Grit
The Waynesville WWTP process design includes fine(primary treatment facility) screens for the
removal of trash and sediment from the liquid treatment trains. The primary treatment facility also
includes a grit removal system composed of a grit concentrator and grit washing/classification unit.
These preliminary treatment facilities are designed with screenings collection capabilities for
short-term storage,prior to being transported to an offsite landfill facility.
Estimated Residuals Production Rates
The estimated residuals production rates for the facility are as shown in Table 1.
Table 1 Residuals Production Rates
Average Annual Maximum Month
Primary Sludge Production Rate, lbs./day 5,858 7,323
Typical Primary Sludge Concentration, % 1% 1%
Typical Primary Sludge Volume, gpd 69,962 87,453
WAS Production Rate, lbs./day 6,911 8,639
Typical WAS Concentration,% 0.8% 0.8%
Typical WAS Volume, gpd 103,381 129,226
Combined Sludge Production Rates, lbs/day 12,770 15,962
Typical Combined Sludge Concentration, % 0.88% _ 0.88%
Typical Combined Sludge Volume,gpd 173,343 216,679 _
Page 1 of 3

Residuals Handling Facilities
The proposed project will include a new primary sludge pump station, a new waste sludge pump
station,new thickening mechanism in gravity sludge thickeners, and a new belt filter press.
Primary and Wasted Activated Sludge Pumping
New primary sludge pumps will transfer primary sludge generated from primary disc filters to the
primary sludge thickener for thickening. New WAS pumps will pump WAS from the new
RAS/WAS pump station to the secondary sludge thickener for thickening.
Sludge Thickening
There is a 22-ft in diameter primary sludge thickener and a 28-ft in diameter WAS sludge thickener
to provide gravity thickening. Mechanical components will be replaced in both thickeners upon
the completion of the project.At an expected feed solid of 2%,the underflows from both thickeners
will be pumped to the aerated sludge holding tank for storage prior to further treatment.
Sludge Holding Tank
The combined sludge is stored in a 60-ft diameter x 25-ft side water depth holding tank with an
approximate volumetric capacity of 527,000 gallons.Aeration and mixing are provided in this tank
by a surface aerator. Underflow from this tank is routed to a sludge handling building where the
sludge can be fully dewatered and(1)routed to the landfill site;(2)or treated to achieve a Class A
product by the RDP process for land application once new clients are identified.
Dewatering
The sludge handling building is equipped a new 2-meter belt filter press (BFP). The BFP is
designed for 150 gallons per minute(hydraulic loading limit)and 2,000 dry pounds per hour(solids
loading limit). Estimated dewatering unit system capacity utilization at the design flow rate is
summarized in Table 2 with the unit operating in dewatering mode.
Table 2 Residuals Production Rates
Average Annual Maximum Month
Sludge Production Rate, lbs./day 12,770 15,962
Typical Combined Sludge Concentration,% 2.66% 2.66%
Typical Combined Sludge Volume,gpd 57,563 71,954
Runtime(HLR limited),hours/day, 6.4 8
Runtime(SLR limited),hours/day 6.4 8
Dewatering Unit Capacity Utilization 26.7% 33.3%
Page 2 of 3

Sludge Storage
There is a covered sludge storage shed, which can provide approximate 3 months of storage for
dewatered sludge at the design capacity of 6 MGD.
Page 3 of 3

REGEI-VED
NZ)EQ/DWIT/NP
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SLUDGE STORAGE TANK IMPROVEMENTS
WAYNESVILLE WWTP
TOWN OF WAYNESVILLE
HAYWOOD COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA
J
FINAL SPECIFICATIONS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES ONLY
NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION
111
Shaping
Communities
Together

RECEIVED
JUL 2 9 2021
NCDEQ/DWRINPDES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SLUDGE STORAGE TANK IMPROVEMENTS
WAYNESVILLE WWTP
TOWN OF WAYNESVILLE
HAYWOOD COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA
y A.,
Civil/Process Design Electrical Design
me .\\\ eAR. .....0`,A.
•,
.....
•
q.
; ..„.ss,„,.., .......
%' = _ : SEAL •
55 Broad Street 050993 = 040817
Asheville, North Carolina 28801 ,y��, ���`' ��••.Fac1N �:�� ���
Firm License No.: C 0459 %,,pN Q���•,� '�.,N/E•••� ....
., B. HE �� 9 L L �� •
�?lri��iiii,ii��»o� ///JJJ11111 10-.1
Daniel L. Giiffee"'fled
Dan'''.
Griffee
J U LY 2021 Griffee ate: 021.07.2209:15:37
-04'0Nelson Heringer, PE Daniel L. Griffee, PE
PROJECT NO. 19.00305 McGill Associates, P.A. McGill Associates, P.A.

TOWN OF WAYNESVILLE
SLUDGE STORAGE TANK IMPROVEMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
033000 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
099000 PAINTING
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260523 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
262213 LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
262416 PANELBOARDS
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
312300 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
320117 BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT REPAIRS
322905 RESTORATION OF SURFACES
329200 TURF AND GRASSES
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
330505 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING
DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS
400500 PIPING GENERAL
400507 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
400551 VALVES
401223 AERATION PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
JULY 2021 TOC-1 PROJECT # 19.00305

TOWN OF WAYNESVILLE
SLUDGE STORAGE TANK IMPROVEMENTS
DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING EQUIPMENT
431133 ROTARY LOBE COMPRESSORS
DIVISION 46 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT
465131 FLEXIBLE MEMBRANCE TUBE DIFFUSERS
JULY 2021 TOC-2 PROJECT # 19.00305

SECTION 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes cast in place concrete as shown on Drawings, and as
specified herein. In general, this work includes cast in place concrete
consisting of Portland Cement, fine and course aggregate, selected admixtures,
mixing, transporting, placing, finishing, and curing as herein specified. This
section further includes fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement,
providing formwork and shoring for this work as well as related items of quality
control, testing, and evaluation of concrete strength.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
2. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Some products and execution are specified in this section by reference to
published specifications or standards of the following with respect abbreviations
used.
1. American Concrete Institute: ACI
2. The American Society for Testing and Materials: ASTM
3. American Welding Society AWS
4. U. S. Products Standards PS
B. Standard References: The current edition of the following standard references
shall apply to the work of this Section except as indicated otherwise on the
Drawings or herein.
1 . Publications of the American Concrete Institute:
a. ACI 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight and Mass Concrete
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 033000-Page 1

b. ACI 211.2 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural
Lightweight Concrete
c. ACI 212 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
d. ACI 214 Guide to Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete
e. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete.
f. ACI 304 Guide for Use of Volumetric-Measuring and Continuous-
Mixing Concrete Equipment
g. ACI 305 Guide to Hot Weather Concreting
h. ACI 306 Guide to Cold Weather Concreting
i. ACI 308 Specification for Curing Concrete
j. ACI 309 Guide for Consolidation of Concrete
k. ACI 311 ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection
I. ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
m. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
n. ACI 347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete.
2. Publications of the American Welding Society:
a. AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel
3. Publications of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute:
a. Manual of Standard Practice
4. Publications of the American Society for Testing and Materials:
a. ASTM A 82 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
b. ASTM A 185 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.
c. ASTM A 615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-
Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
d. ASTM A 996 Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel
Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or
more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans,
ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance
with requirements.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 033000 -Page 2

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures
when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or
other circumstances warrant adjustments.
1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at
Project site.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication,
bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar
schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and
laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for
concrete reinforcement.
D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified
professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of
stripping formwork, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and
removal.
E. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to
construct the structure.
1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Engineer.
F. Samples: For waterstops and/or vapor retarder.
G. Qualification Data: For Installer and Manufacturer.
H. Welding certificates.
I. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Form materials and form-release agents.
4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5. Fiber reinforcement.
6. Waterstops.
7. Curing compounds.
8. Floor and slab treatments.
9. Bonding agents.
10. Adhesives.
11 . Vapor retarders.
12. Semirigid joint filler.
13. Joint-filler strips.
14. Repair materials.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 033000—Page 3

J. Contractor shall submit records of all concrete pours showing exact location of
pour, date of pour, quantity of pour, and class of concrete poured to the
Engineer each month. Temperature at time of pour should also be recorded.
K. Contractor shall also submit to the Engineer chemical and physical analysis of
all cement and fly ash delivered to the batch plant seven (7) days prior to use of
the cement or fly ash.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel
qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor
who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed
concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for
production facilities and equipment.
1 . Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready
Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the
same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single
source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.
D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1 .4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following applicable standards unless
modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:
1. ACI 301 , "Specifications for Structural Concrete"
"SpecificationsConcrete
2. ACI 117, for Tolerances for Co c ete Construction and
Materials."
F. Concrete Testing Service: Owner shall engage a qualified independent testing
agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
G. If the average strength of the laboratory control cylinders shows the concrete to
be below the specified design strength, the aggregate proportions and water
content may be changed by the Engineer, who, in addition to such changes,
may require core tests. Tests confirming concrete strengths on hardened
concrete which was poured without testing shall be paid for by the Contractor.
H. Prepare design mixes for each class of concrete used in accordance with ACI
311.1 . The Contractor shall pay for all design mix costs. Submit written reports
to the Engineer for each proposed mix for each class of concrete prior to start of
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 033000-Page 4

work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been approved by the
Engineer.
I. Strength data for establishing standard deviation and required overstrength
factor will be considered suitable if the concrete production facility has certified
records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in one group or the statistical
average for two groups totaling 30 or more tests representing similar materials
and project conditions. Records of these tests shall be submitted with the
proposed design mix.
J. If standard deviation exceeds 800 psi or if no suitable records are available,
selected proportions to produce an average strength of at least 1200 psi greater
than the required compressive strength of concrete. If standard deviations are
less than 600 psi, the minimum overstrength factor required in the design mix
shall be in accordance with ACI 318, Section 4.3.1.
K. Design mixes shall be proportioned using the maximum specified slump and
temperature. Laboratory test date for revised mix designs and strength results
must be submitted to and accepted by the Engineer before using in the work.
Admixtures shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions. Design mix shall be proportioned using the proposed admixtures
at optimum recommended dosages. The manufacturer of the mixture shall
prepare and submit test date used to determine the optimum dosage.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Reinforcing Steel shall be delivered to the Project Site properly tagged,
bundled, and ready to place. Reinforcing steel delivered to the Project Site, and
not immediately placed in forms, shall be protected from mud, excessive rust
producing conditions, oil, grease, or distortion. Reinforcing steel shall be stored
off the ground.
B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight,
dirt, oil, and other contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide
continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable
sizes to minimize number of joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials shall be high quality
and standard for the industry.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000-Page 5

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another
approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side
for tight fit.
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-
reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual
or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide
units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without
detrimental deformation.
D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to
resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance,
structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other
superimposed loads.
F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
G. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form
removal.
H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not
bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair
subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing
materials.
I. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-
reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete
on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the
plane of exposed concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in
diameter in concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive
dampproofing or waterproofing.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Unless otherwise indicated, all reinforcing steel shall conform to one of the
following ASTM Standards, latest edition:
1. ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
2. ASTM A 996, Grade 60.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000—Page 6

1
B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: Where indicated steel reinforcement shall be
epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch bar
length.
C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184, fabricated from ASTM A 615, Grade 60,
deformed bars, assembled with clips.
D. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82.
E. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496.
F. Epoxy-Coated Wire: ASTM A 884, Class A, Type 1, with less than 2 percent
damaged coating in each 12-inch wire length.
G. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from
steel wire into flat sheets.
H. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
I. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884, Class A coated,
Type 1, steel.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
B. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars,
ASTM A 775 epoxy coated.
C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with
epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775.
D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in
place. Manufacture bar supports from stainless steel wire, plastic, or precast
concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater
compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports
contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI
Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-
polymer-coated wire bar supports.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 033000-Page 7

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same
type, brand, and source, throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement shall be fresh stock of an approved standard brand
meeting the requirements of ASTM C 150, of Type II, white. Only one
brand of cement shall be used except when otherwise approved by the
Engineer, and the Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the brand name
of the cement proposed for use. The Contractor shall submit a copy of
mill test reports on all cement delivered to the job 7 days prior to use of
the cement. Cube strength from mill tests shall have a tolerance of ±600
psi. The fineness of cement used shall not have more than 10 percent
retained on a no. 325 mesh screen when tested in accordance with ASTM
C 430.
2. Fly Ash shall have a high fineness and low carbon content and shall
exceed the requirements of ASTM C 618, Class 7, except that the loss of
ignition shall be less than 3 percent, and all fly ash shall be a classified
processed material. Fly ash shall be obtained from one source for the
concrete delivered to the project. Complete chemical and physical
analysis of each carload of fly ash shall be submitted to the Engineer ten
(10) days prior to use of each carload delivered. Concrete mixes
proportioned with fly ash shall contain not less than 10 percent nor more
than 20 percent by weight of cement of fly ash.
B. Concrete Aqqreqates: Unless otherwise specified all aggregate shall be normal
weight aggregate in accordance with ASTM C 33.
1. Aggregate for concrete shall consist of clean crushed stone or gravel
having hard, strong, uncoated particles free from injurious amounts of soft,
thin, elongated or laminated pieces, alkali, organic or other deleterious
matter. Maximum aggregate size shall be 3/-inch. The maximum
permissible percentage of elongated particles shall not exceed 5 percent
by weight. Elongated particles are those defined as having a length equal
to or greater than 5 times the width. Samples of coarse aggregate shall
be submitted to the testing laboratory for testing and approval prior to use.
The fineness modulus of the coarse aggregate shall not vary for more
than ±0.3 percent.
2. Where lightweight aggregate is specified, provide aggregate in
accordance with ASTM C 330.
3. Provide aggregates from a single source.
C. Fine Aggregate shall consist of sand, stone screening, or other inert materials
with similar characteristics having clean, strong, durable, uncoated grains and
free from lumps, soft or flaky particles, clay, shale, alkali, organic matter or
other deleterious substances with reactivity to alkali in cement. Fine aggregate
shall be submitted for testing and approval to the testing laboratory. The
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000-Page 8

laboratory shall verify that fine aggregate conforms to ASTM standards by
making standard colormetric, sediment, and comparative tensile tests, and by
sieve analysis. The fineness modules of the sand shall not vary by more than
±0.2 percent. Color shall be standard as determined from colormetric tests.
D. Water shall be potable water in accordance with ASTM C 94.
2.5 ADMIXTURES
A. When required or permitted, admixtures shall conform to the appropriate
specification indicated. Do not use admixtures which have not been
incorporated and tested in the accepted mixes unless otherwise authorized in
writing by the Engineer.
1. Air-Entraining Admixture shall be in accordance with ASTM C 260.
a. Air-entraining admixtures shall be used for all concrete exposed to
freezing and thawing or subjected to hydraulic pressure. Entrained
air shall conform to the air control limits of Table 3.4.1 of ACI 301 .
The water-cement ratio for all air-entrained concrete exposed to
freezing and thawing shall not exceed 0.53.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be
compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble
chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use
calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1 . Water-Reducing Admixtures shall be hydroxolated polymer type in
accordance with ASTM C 494, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494,
Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.
2.6 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible PVC Waterstops shall be in accordance with CE CRD-C 572 for
embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints with factory-
fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
1. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following:
a. W. R. Meadows.
b. Greenstreak.
c. Vinylex Corp.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 033000-Page 9

2. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb
3. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick; nontapered.
B. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or
trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic
polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch.
C. Self-Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or
trapezoidal strip, bentonite-free hydrophilic polymer modified chloroprene
rubber, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/8 by 3/4 inch.
2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Sheet Vapor Barrier shall be minimum 10 mil polyethylene film that complies
with ASTM C171 and meets or exceeds test for water retention, ASTM C 156.
2.8 CRUSHED STONE FILL
A. Crushed Stone Fill shall be uniform 1-inch stone, no fines, in conformance to
ASTM C 33.
2.9 CURING MATERIALS
A. Liquid curing material for concrete shall exceed the requirements of ASTM C
309, Type I. Products acceptable shall provide water retention not exceeding a
loss of 0.020 grams per sq. cm. when tested at a coverage of 200 sq. ft. per
gallon and tested in accordance with ASTM C 156. Submit test data verifying
these requirements for approval.
B. Burlap shall be free of sizing or any substance that is injurious to cement or can
cause discoloration. Burlap shall be rinsed in water prior to use. Burlap shall
be sufficient thickness to retain water without requiring wetting.
C. Water: Potable.
2.10 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Pre-molded Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips shall be asphalt-
saturated cellulosic fiber or in accordance with ASTM D 1751.
B. Joint Sealing Compound shall be a two-part mineral filled epoxy polyurethane,
and shall be used for all exposed joints in exterior paving slabs, sidewalks,
where concrete slabs abut concrete walls, and in exposed joints in slabs on
grade.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 033000—Page 10

C. Surface Coating for all exposed concrete except where otherwise shown shall
be "Thoroseal" as manufactured by the Standard Dry Wall Co., or an approved
equal.
D. Steel for Embedded Angles and Plate Cast in Concrete shall conform to ASTM
A 36. Plates and angles shall receive a commercial sand blast and be painted
with an inorganic zinc base paint equal to Carbomastic #11 , or an approved
equal.
2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product
that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended
hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for
substrate, conditions, and application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109.
B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product
that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a
scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended
hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate,
conditions, and application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as
recommended by topping manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109.
2.12 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Concrete shall be mixed at batch plants or it may be transit mixed as specified
herein. Concrete batch plants must comply with the requirements of ASTM C
94 and ACI-304 with sufficient capacity of producing concrete of the quantity
and quality as specified herein. All plant facilities are subject to inspection by
the Engineer. Ready-mix concrete shall comply with requirements of ASTM C
94, and as specified herein, unless otherwise noted. During hot weather or
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 033000-Page 11

under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time
than specified in ASTM C 94 will be required as follows:
1. When air temperatures are between 80 degrees F. and 90 degrees F.,
reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 1 hour
2. When outside air temperatures are above 90 degrees F, reduce the
mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 45 minutes.
B. Addition of water at the site for concrete mix with insufficient slumps, slumps
less than the maximum specified herein, will not be permitted. Concrete
delivered to the project with slump less than the minimum or greater than the
maximum specified shall be rejected and discarded off site.
C. Batch tickets for each load of concrete shall be submitted to the Engineer. The
following information shall be provided on each batch ticket:
1. Design mix designation
2. Exact time cement, water and aggregate were discharged into the mix
3. Compressive strength of mix
4. Amount of water added to the mix
D. Maintain equipment in proper operating condition, with drums cleaned before
charging of each batch. Schedule delivery of trucks in order to prevent delay of
placing after mixing.
E. Slump: All concrete shall be proportioned and produced to have a maximum
slump of 4 inches and a minimum slump of 2 inches. A tolerance of up to, but
not exceeding, 1 inch above the indicated maximum shall be allowed for
individual batches in any one day's pour provided the average of the most
recent ten batches within the same pour does not exceed the maximum limits.
No tolerance will be permitted for individual batches when less than ten (10)
batches are delivered for one day's pour.
F. *Concrete Type and Strengths
Location Maximum Size *28 Day Compressive
Aggregate Strength
Slabs on Grade 3/4" 4000 psi
Walls 3/4" 4000 psi
Columns 3/4" See Notes on Plan
Beams, Supported 3/4" 4000 psi
Slabs & Joists
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 033000—Page 12

*Twenty-eight day strength shall be as determined from concrete sampled in
accordance with ASTM C 172 and 4-inch diameter x 8—inch cylinders tested in
accordance with ASTM C 31 and C 39.
2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard
Practice." All reinforcing steel shall be cut and shop fabricated and delivered to
the project properly tagged, bundled and ready to place.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK DESIGN
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of all concrete formwork.
Formwork shall be designed in accordance with ACI 347 unless otherwise
noted. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork so that it will safely
support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be
supported by the concrete structure. Carry vertical and lateral loads to ground
by formwork system and in place construction that has attained adequate
strength for that purpose. Construct formwork so that concrete members and
structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position
indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
B. Design forms and falsework to include assumed values of live load, dead load,
weight of moving equipment operated on formwork, concrete mix, height of
concrete drop, vibrator frequency, ambient temperature, foundation pressure,
stresses, lateral stability, and other factors pertinent to safety of structure during
construction. Provide shores and struts with positive means of adjustment
capable of taking up formwork settlement during concrete placing operations,
using wedges or jacks or a combination thereof. Support form facing materials
by structural members spaced sufficiently close to prevent deflection. Fit forms
placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate alignment, free
from irregularities and within allowable tolerances. Provide camber in formwork
as required for anticipated deflections due to weight and pressures of fresh
concrete. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement
paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints and provide backup
material at joints as required to prevent leakage and fins.
C. Formwork for foundation systems may be omitted when workmanship and soil
conditions permit accurate excavation and the omission is approved by the
Engineer. Provide temporary openings in wall forms, column forms, and other
locations necessary to permit inspection and cleanout.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000-Page 13

D. Form accessories to be partially or wholly embedded in the concrete, such as
ties and hangers, shall be a commercially manufactured type. Non-fabricated
wire shall be used. Form ties shall be constructed so that the end fasteners can
be removed without causing appreciable spalling at the faces of the concrete.
After the ends or end fasteners of form ties have been removed, the embedded
portion of the ties shall terminate not less than two diameters or twice the
minimum dimensions of the tie from the formed faces of concrete to be
permanently exposed to view except that in no case shall this distance be less
than 3/-inches. When the formed face of the concrete is not to be permanently
exposed to view, form ties may be cut off flush with the formed surfaces.
E. At construction joints, contact surface of the form for sheeting for flush surfaces
exposed to view shall overlap the hardened concrete in the previous placement
by more than one foot. The forms shall be held against the hardened concrete
to prevent offsets or loss of mortar at the construction joint and to maintain a
true surface. Wood forms for wall openings shall be constructed to facilitate
loosening, if necessary, to counteract swelling of the forms. Wedges used for
final adjustment of the forms prior to concrete placement shall be fastened in
position after the final check. Formwork shall be so anchored to shores or other
supporting surfaces or members that upward or lateral movement of any parts
of the formwork system during concrete placement will be prevented. Runways
for moving equipment or pump lines shall be provided with struts or legs and
shall be supported directly on the formwork or structural member without resting
on the reinforcing steel. When mudsills are to be placed for supporting
concrete forms, a reasonably level and sufficiently compacted surface will be
required. Shores shall be plumb within acceptable tolerances.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve
required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and
secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-
type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior
area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to
forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate
temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
H. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds,
and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades
providing such items.
I. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete
surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast
concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5
horizontal to 1 vertical.
1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000-Page 14

2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
3.2 FORMWORK TOLERENCES
A. Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, formwork shall be constructed so
that the concrete surfaces will conform to the tolerance limits listed in Table
4.3.1 of ACI 301 .
B. The Contractor shall establish and maintain in an undisturbed condition and
until final completion and acceptance of the project, sufficient control points and
p p
bench marks to be used for reference purposes to check tolerances.
3.3 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES AND FORM COATINGS
A. All surfaces of forms and embedded materials shall be cleaned of any
accumulated mortar or grout from previous concreting and of all other foreign
materials before concrete is placed in the forms.
B. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent
mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
C. Coat form contact surfaces with form coating compound before reinforcement is
placed. Provide form coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, or
adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of
concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion or impede the wetting of surfaces
to be cured with water or curing compounds. Do not allow excess form coating
material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with surfaces
against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply coatings in compliance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished
with items to be embedded.
1 . Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and
complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall
flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing
is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.
3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 033000- Page 15

3.5 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. Formwork for columns, walls, sides of beams, and other parts not supporting
the weight of the concrete may be removed as soon as the concrete has
hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations provided
surfaces are cured and protected from cold weather as specified herein.
B. Forms and shoring in the formwork used to support the weight of concrete in
beams, slabs and other structural members, shall remain in place until the
concrete has reached the minimum strength specified of 75 percent of the
specified 28-day design strength. Strength of concrete must be verified by
concrete test cylinders molded and cured in the field under the same conditions
that the concrete represented by these cylinders are cured and/or maturity
meters connected to thermo-couples embedded in the concrete. It shall be the
responsibility of the concrete technician, employed by the Owner, to inform the
General Contractor when the strength of concrete cured in the field has attained
the minimum specified strength required for removal of the forms.
C. Bottom forms of slabs shall not be removed in less time than is indicated below
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Above 60 degrees F. 50 degrees F. 40 to 50 degrees F.
8 days 10 days 18 days
D. When temperature is below 40 degrees F., the shores shall remain in place for
an additional time equal to the lower temperature.
E. When shores and other vertical supports are so arranged that the non-load-
carrying form-facing material may be removed without loosening or disturbing
the shores and supports, the facing material may be removed at an earlier age
as specified or permitted. Wood forms for wall openings shall be loosened as
soon as this can be accomplished without damage to the concrete.
F. When repair of surface defects or finishing is required at an early age, forms
shall be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist
damage from removal operations.
G. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed,
delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable
for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.
H. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten
to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched
forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Engineer.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000-Page 16

3.6 SHORES AND RESHORES
A. When reshoring is permitted or required, the operations shall be planned in
advance and shall be subject to approval. While reshoring is under way, no live
load shall be permitted on the new construction.
B. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of
shoring and reshoring.
1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances
is complete.
C. In no case during reshoring shall concrete in beam, slabs, column or any other
structural member be subjected to combined dead and construction loads in
excess of the loads permitted by the Engineer for the developed concrete
strength at the time of reshoring. Reshores shall be placed as soon as
practicable after stripping operations are complete but in no case later than the
end of the working day on which stripping occurs.
D. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete.
Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without
excessive stress or deflection.
3.7 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder
according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
3.8 CRUSHED STONE FILL
A. Crushed Stone Fill, 6 inches in depth, shall be placed under all concrete floors
in contact with the ground. Stone shall be compacted as thoroughly as possible
by tamping and rolling.
3.9 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing
reinforcement.
B. Bars used for concrete reinforcement shall meet the following requirements for
fabrication tolerance.
Sheared Length +1"
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 033000-Page 17

Overall Dimension of Stirrups +1/2"
All Other Bends +1"
C. Bars shall be placed to the following tolerances:
Concrete Cover to Formed Surfaces +1/4"
Top Bars in Slabs +1/4"
Top Bars in Beams +1/2"
Horizontal Tolerance from Vertical
Surfaces +1/4"
Vertical Bars in Columns +1/4"
Vertical and Horizontal Bars in Walls +1/2"
Lengthwise in Member +2"
Wire Fabric +1/2" from center of slab or
location called for on drawings
D. Bars may be moved one bar diameter as necessary to avoid interference with
other reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items. If the bars are moved
more than one bar diameter, the resulting arrangement of bars shall be subject
to approval.
E. Minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement except for extremely
corrosive atmosphere or other severe exposures shall be as follows:
p
Concrete deposited Against the Ground 3"
Formed Surfaces Exposed to Weather 2"
or in Contact With the Ground
1-1/2" for Beams and
Column Ties; 3/4" for Slabs
Interior Surfaces: and Walls; Beam and
Column Bars Shall be
Anchored Against the Ties.
F. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor
retarder before placing concrete.
G. All reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed, shall be free of mud, oil, or
other materials that may adversely affect or reduce the bond. Reinforcement
with rust, mill scale or tooth will be accepted as being satisfactory without
cleaning or brushing provided the dimensions and weights, including heights of
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 033000—Page 18

deformations, of a cleaned sample shall not be less than required by applicable
ASTM Standards.
H. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement
from construction loads, the placement of concrete or other anticipated loads.
Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum
concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
I. The Contractor shall securely maintain the steel reinforcement accurately in
place until the concrete is placed. Any and all disturbances of reinforcing from
any cause whatsoever shall be fully corrected prior to placing of concrete, and
all damaged bar supports and spaces shall be repaired or removed and
replaced. All bars shall be extended beyond stress points the development
length of the bar or be provided with an equivalent development length with a
hook.
J. When required or approved, welding of reinforcing steel shall conform to
AWS D1 .4. No welding shall be done at the bend in a bar. Welding of cross
bars (tack welding) shall not be permitted except as authorized or directed by
the Engineer.
K. Over formwork, metal, plastic or other approved bar chairs and spacers shall be
furnished. When the concrete surface will be exposed to weather in the
finished structure or where rust would impair architectural finishes, the portions
of all accessories in contact with the formwork shall be stainless steel or plastic.
L. Unless otherwise shown on the plans and details, the following accessories
shall be provided for supports for all reinforcement:
1. Reinforced slabs-on-grade shall have plain precast concrete blocks
sufficient to support bars within prescribed tolerances, or individual high
chairs with runners to rest on soil.
2. Slab bars shall have continuous slab bolsters for bottom bars spaced a
maximum distance of 48 inches on center, and for individual high chairs
spaced 48 inches with a no.6 continuous support bar for top bars. Top bar
supports shall be spaced a maximum distance apart of 48 inches and no
greater than 18 inches from the overhanging ends of bars.
3. Beam bottom bars shall have beam bolsters spaced a maximum distance
of 72 inches. Top beam bars may be supported from beam stirrups where
permitted provided beam stirrups are fabricated sufficiently accurate to
permit top bars to be placed within the tolerances permitted. Individual
high chairs are required where ties or other supports are not provided.
4. Box out all slots, chases, recesses or openings as shown on the drawings
and specifications and as required by the work of other trades. Box out for
all temporary openings such as slots, pipe spaces, etc., and build forms to
seal up when and as required. Inserts, anchors, ties, hangers, etc. shall
be built into concrete as required to secure the work of the various
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 033000—Page 19

subcontractors. Collars, sleeves, thimbles, anchors, sockets, etc., shall be
furnished to the General Contractor by the other subcontractors for
installation in the formwork. Sleeves shall not displace the reinforcing
steel from its designated location by more than one bar diameter unless
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
design, engineering, construction and the coordination of the placement of
items affecting each trade in the formwork.
M. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete
surfaces.
N. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports
spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least
1/2 mesh plus end extension of wires but not less than 6 inches. Offset laps of
adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace
overlaps with wire. Wire mesh shall be so placed as to positively secure its
position 1/3 of the slab thickness below the top of the slab for slabs on grade.
O. Splices and offsets in reinforcements at points of maximum stress shall not be
made. All splices shall be approved, and shall provide sufficient lap to transfer
the stress between the bars by the required development length of the bars.
The character and design of each splice shall conform to the requirements of
the ACI 318. Bars shall not be bent after being embedded in hardened
concrete, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Bars with kinks or bends not
shown on the drawings shall not be placed. The heating of reinforcement for
bending or straightening will be permitted only if the entire operation is
approved by the Engineer.
P. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with
epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963. Use epoxy-coated steel wire
ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement.
Q. The Engineer shall always be notified of the pouring schedule in advance and in
ample time prior to placement of concrete to inspect the reinforcement.
Inspection of reinforcement will be made only after each section to be poured is
complete.
3.10 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane
of concrete.
B. Clean joint surface of laitance, coatings, loose particles, and foreign matter to
expose aggregate. Prepare for bonding of fresh concrete to new concrete that
has hardened; at joints between foundation systems and walls dampen, but do
not saturate, the roughened and cleaned surface of set concrete immediately
before placing fresh concrete. In lieu of neat cement grout, bonding grout may
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000-Page 20

be a commercial bonding agent. Apply to cleaned concrete surfaces in
accordance with the printed instruction of this bonding material manufacturer.
C. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete will be least
impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement
across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue
reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in all construction joints in
walls, slabs, and between walls, and foundation systems.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders near the middle of
spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam
width from a beam-girder intersection.
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs,
beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers
integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where
possible.
6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed
against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
D. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,
sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a
depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving
and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of
contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool
marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide
joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise
damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
E. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler
strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals,
foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1
inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants are indicated.
2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than
one length is required, lace or clip sections together.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000-Page 21

F. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where
indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent
concrete bonding to one side of joint.
3.11 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible Waterstops: Provide PVC Waterstops in all construction joints in
concrete walls and in concrete beams and slabs. PVC waterstops shall also be
provided between concrete beams and slabs at all expansion joints to form a
continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and
protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints
in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other
locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive
bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in
longest lengths practicable.
3.12 SLABS ON GRADE:
A. Preparation of Subgrade: The subgrade shall be well drained and of adequate
and uniform loadbearing nature. The in-place density of the subgrade soils
shall be at least the minimum required in the specifications. The bottom of an
undrained granular base course shall not be lower than the adjacent finished
grade. The subgrade shall be free of frost before concrete placing begins. If
the temperature inside a building where concrete is to be placed is below
freezing, it shall be raised and maintained above 50 degrees F. long enough to
remove all frost from the subgrade. The subgrade shall be moist at the time of
concreting. If necessary, it shall be dampened with water in advance of
concreting, but there shall be no free water standing on the subgrade nor any
muddy or soft spots when the concrete is placed.
B. Joints: Joints in slabs on grade shall be located as to divide the slab in areas
not in excess of 800 sq. ft. The maximum distance between joints in slabs on
grade at all points of contact between slabs on grade and vertical surfaces such
as foundation walls and elsewhere as indicated. At exposed joints, recess the
premolded fill on a minimum oft-inch, and fill the remaining section with a joint
seal and as specified herein. All exposed construction joints in the slabs on
grade shall have the edges tooled and the crack and groove formed by the
edging tool filled with a polyurethane joint sealant. No Form-A-Key or similar
metal form joints will be permitted.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000—Page 22

3.13 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items
to be embedded or cast-in must be complete. Notify other crafts involved in
ample time to permit the installation of their work; co-operate with other trades
in setting such work, as required. Notify Engineer upon completion of
installation of all reinforcing and other items in ample time to permit inspection
of the work. Soil bottoms at foundation systems are subject to testing
laboratory as directed by the Engineer. Place concrete immediately after
approval of foundation excavations.
B. Before placing concrete, all equipment for mixing and transporting and placing
concrete shall be cleaned, all debris and ice removed from spaces to be
occupied by the concrete, forms thoroughly cleaned of soil, ice, or other
coatings which will prevent proper bond, reinforcement shall be securely tied in
place and expansion joint material, anchors, and other embedded items shall
be securely positioned. Hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be
removed from the conveying equipment.
C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during
placement unless approved by Engineer.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing
admixtures to mixture.
D. Place concrete in compliance with the practices and recommendations of ACI
304 or as herein specified. Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the
place of final deposit as rapidly as practical by methods which will prevent
separation or loss of ingredients and in a manner which will assure that the
required quality concrete is obtained. Conveying equipment shall be of size
and design to insure a continuous flow of concrete at the delivery point.
E. Concrete placed by pumping shall conform to the recommendations of ACI
Publication, "Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods."
F. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such
thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened
enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed
continuously, construction joints shall be located at points as provided for in the
drawings or as approved. Deposit concrete as nearly as possible to its final
location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not subject
concrete to any procedure which will cause segregation.
1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork
design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment
according to ACI 301.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000-Page 23

3. Do not use concrete which has become non-plastic and unworkable or
does not meet the required quality control limits, or which has become
contaminated by foreign material. Remove rejected concrete from the
project site and dispose of in an acceptable location. Consolidate
concrete placed in forms by mechanical vibrating equipment
supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, and tamping. Vibration of forms
and reinforcing steel will not be permitted.
4. Screed concrete which is to receive other construction to the proper level
to avoid excessive skimming or grouting.
G. Do not use concrete which has become non-plastic and unworkable or does not
meet the required quality control limits, or which has become contaminated by
foreign material. Remove rejected concrete from the project site and dispose of
in an acceptable location. Consolidate concrete placed in forms by mechanical
vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, and tamping.
Vibration of forms and reinforcing steel will not be permitted.
H. Concrete shall not be allowed to "freefall" a distance greater than 36 inches. All
concrete placed in columns and walls shall be placed through a tremie with the
bottom or outlet of the tremie being held at maximum of 36 inches above the
surface where concrete is being placed.
I. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation,
within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is
complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is
thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and
into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct
elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and
open-textured surface plane, free of lumps and hollows before excess
bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic
surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing
operations.
J. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect
concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused
by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
1. All concrete placed in temperatures 40 degrees F. or below or exposed to
temperatures 40 degrees F. or below within five (5) days after the
concrete is placed, shall conform to the requirements of ACI 306.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000—Page 24

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not
place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen
materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze
agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved
in mixture designs.
K. The following protection requirements for concrete placed, protected, and cured
in temperature 40 degrees F. or less shall be considered the minimum
acceptable standards.
1. Slabs, Beams: Enclose the entire perimeter of the floor below with a
continuous sheet of reinforced polyethylene or canvas. The enclosure
shall be securely fastened to the top of the outside edge of the forms of
the area being protected and to the slab or floor level immediately below
the concrete being protected. The top of the concrete surface shall be
covered with either insulating blankets designed specifically for this use, or
sheets of polystyrene covered with polyethylene. Sufficient heaters shall
be placed in the enclosure below the slabs to maintain the air temperature
within all sections of the enclosure between 60 degrees F. and 70 degrees
F. for a minimum period of five (5) days. Salamanders will not be
permitted.
2. Columns and Walls: Forms shall remain in place for a minimum of five
days. When the outside temperature falls below 32 degrees F., an
insulating blanket shall be dropped over and around the perimeter of the
column or wall. These blankets shall remain in place for a minimum
period of five days.
3. Slabs on Grade: Cover top with insulating blankets. Blankets shall remain
in place for a minimum period of five days.
4. Temperature of concrete at placement shall not be less than 55 degrees
F.
5. In addition to laboratory-cured test specimens, additional concrete test
specimens shall be cured under the same field conditions that the
concrete in the field represented by these cylinders is cured and high
thermometers shall be placed on the surface of slab to record daily
temperatures during curing period.
L. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 305 and as follows:
1. An approved admixture designed to retard the rate of set shall be used for
all concrete placed when temperatures exceed 75 degrees F. Set
retarding admixtures shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type D, water
reducing and retarding.
2. Wet forms thoroughly before placing. Cool reinforcing by wetting
sufficiently so that steel temperatures will be nearly equal to the ambient
air temperature.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000-Page 25

3. Provide wind breaks around the perimeter of the area where concrete is
being placed.
4. Fresh concrete with temperatures 90 degrees F. or above shall be
discarded off site.
5. The amount of cement used in the job is computed for the temperature
indicated on the approved design mix. For higher concrete mix
temperature, the weight of the cement shall be increased at the rate of 12
lbs. per cubic yard for each 10 degrees F. above the concrete mix
temperature.
3.14 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Standard Rough Form Finish: Provide a standard rough form finish to all
concrete formed surfaces that are to be concealed in the finish work or other
construction. NOTE: Interior faces of walls of water retaining structures are not
considered to be concealed. Standard rough form finish shall consist of all
defective areas repaired as specified and all holes or voids larger than 3/8 inch
filled with cement grout.
B. Standard Finish for Exposed Surfaces: Provide an applied surface finish of
"Thoroseal" or an approved equal to all exposed interior and exterior concrete
finishes unless otherwise noted. Interior faces of walls of water retaining
structures, including areas which are normally submerged, are considered to be
exposed surfaces and shall receive the specified standard finish for exposed
surfaces. The surface finish shall consist of chopping and/or grinding down all
high spots removing grinding of all burrs and/or other projections, filling all voids
3/8 inch and larger, and cutting out all unsound concrete and patching as
specified herein. Before applying the finish, wet and clean the surface of all
grease, oils, efflorescence, and other foreign material. Dampen surface
immediately ahead of application. Apply the finish coat with a tampico fiber
brush by laying the finish coat on the wall in a thick coat of a minimum of 2 lbs.
per sq. yard, and brush to a uniform level surface. Do not apply in
temperatures 40 degrees F or below, or when temperatures are likely to fall
below 40 degrees F within 24 hours after application. The finish coat shall be
mixed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. After the
finish coat has cured, apply a finish coat of "Quick Seal" at a minimum of 12 lb.
per sq. yd. The Thoroseal shall be applied by trained technicians.
C. Smooth Form Finish: Provide a smooth form finish for all exposed interior
concrete walls inside buildings, in pipe gallery areas, or as noted on the
Drawings. Standard form finish shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture
on the concrete. The arrangement of the forms and the number of seams and
joints shall be kept to a minimum. Immediately after forms are removed, cut out
all unsound concrete and patch as specified herein, and fill all pinholes and
other voids larger than 1/4 inch with a cement grout. Compress mortar into voids
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000-Page 26

with a firm rubber trowel or float. After mortar dries, wipe off surface with
burlap.
3.15 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R recommendations for screeding,
restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet
concrete surfaces.
B. Scratched Finish: After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off,
and leveled to a Class C tolerance, but still plastic, the surface shall be
roughened with stiff brushes or rakes before a final set. A scratched finish shall
be applied to all surfaces which are to receive a bonded surface finish.
C. Floated Finish: After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and
leveled, the concrete shall not be worked further until ready for floating.
Floating shall begin when the water sheen has disappeared and when the
surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation. During or after the first
floating, planeness of surface shall be checked with a 10'-0" straight edge
applied at not less than two different angles. All high spots shall be cut down
and all low spots filled during this procedure to produce a surface with Class B
tolerance throughout. This slab shall then be floated immediately to a uniform
sandy texture. A float finish shall be applied to all slab surfaces which are to
receive a waterproofing membrane.
D. Troweled Finish: The surface shall first be float-finished as specified. It shall
next be power troweled, and finally hand troweled. The first troweling after
power floating shall produce a smooth surface which may still show some
trowel marks. Additional troweling shall be done by hand after the surface has
hardened sufficiently. The final troweling shall be done when a ringing sound is
produced as the trowel is moved over the surface. The surface shall be
thoroughly consolidated by the hand troweling operations. The finished surface
shall be essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in texture, and appearance,
and shall be planed to a Class tolerance. On surfaces intended to support floor
coverings, any defects of sufficient magnitude to show through the floor
covering shall be removed by grinding. A trowel finish shall be applied to all
surfaces which are exposed to view or are to receive a floor covering of carpet,
vinyl, asbestos, tiles, etc.
E. Broom Finish: Immediately after the concrete has received a float finish as
specified in Section B, it shall be given a coarse transverse scored texture by
drawing a broom or burlap belt across the surface. A broom finish shall be
applied to all parking surfaces, exterior concrete walks, and concrete paving
slabs.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000—Page 27

3.16 FINISHING TOLERANCES
A. Finishes with a Class C tolerance shall be true planes within 1/4 inch in 24
inches as determined by a 24-inch straight edge placed elsewhere on the slab
in any direction. Variation from level for Class A. tolerance shall not exceed 1/4
inch in 10'-0" or 1/2 inch maximum in any one bay between columns. Variation
from level for a Class B and Class C finish shall not exceed 1/4 inch in 10'-0" or
3/ inch in any one bay between columns.
3.17 RELATED UNFORMED SURFACES
A. As tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching
the adjacent formed surfaces. Continue the final surface treatment of formed
surfaces uniformly across the adjacent unformed surface unless otherwise
shown.
3.18 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of
other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure
concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other
miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while
concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish
with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases
and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and
equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from
manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and
associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings.
Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.
3.19 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive
cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection
and ACI 305 for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000-Page 28

temperature for the period of time necessary for hydration of the cement and
proper hardening of the concrete.
C. Curing for all horizontal slab surfaces, except those to receive a bonded finish
material, during periods when the outside air temperature does not exceed 60
degrees F. shall be provided by applying a membrane-forming curing
compound to concrete surfaces as soon as the final troweling or floating
operation has been completed. Apply uniformly with a roller brush at a rate not
to exceed 200 sq. ft. per gallon. Maintain the continuity of the coating and
repair damage to the coat during the entire curing period. Curing for surfaces to
receive a bonded finish material shall be as noted below. Curing for all
horizontal surfaces during period when the outside air temperature will exceed
60 degrees F. shall be provided by covering the entire surface with burlap. The
burlap shall be lapped 1/2 width in order to provide a double thickness of
burlap. Immediately following the placement of the burlap, the entire surface
shall be maintained continuously wet for a period of 7 days. Do not permit
surfaces to dry at any period during the required curing period.
D. Cure formed surfaces by moist curing with the forms in place for the full curing
period, or until forms are removed. If forms are removed before the curing
period is complete, apply a membrane-forming curing compound to damp
surfaces as soon as the water film has disappeared. Apply uniformly in
continuous operation by roller brushes in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions.
E. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered
with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or with any other cover or
finish material which shall be bonded to the concrete. These surfaces must be
watercured with a full coverage of burlap kept continuously moist for a period of
7 days.
F. During the curing period, protect concrete from damaging mechanical
disturbances, including load stresses, shocks, excessive vibration and from
change caused by subsequent construction operations.
3.20 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill
joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints;
leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000—Page 29

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep
in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after
hardening.
3.21 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by
Engineer. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched
to Engineer's approval.
B. Repair and patch defective areas immediately after removal of forms as
directed by the Engineer. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over inch
in diameter and holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete, but in no
case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the
concrete surfaces. Expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/ inch clearance all
around. Dampen all concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and
brush with a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Place
patching concrete before grout takes its initial set. Mix patching concrete of the
same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as the original
adjacent concrete. Place, compact, and finish as required to blend with
adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete.
C. Fill holes extending through concrete by means of a plunger type gun or other
suitable device from the least exposed face to insure complete filling. Remove
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning for all
exposed surfaces. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1
inch in diameter by the dry-pack method. Groove the top of cracks and cut out
holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen all
cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with a neat cement grout coating. Place
dry-pack, consisting of 1 part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate
passing a no. 16 mesh sieve using only enough water as required for handling
and placing. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match the existing
surface.
D. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for the passage of work by
other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after the work of other trades
is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-
place construction. Provide all other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or
required to complete work.
E. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after the concrete has
cured at least 14 days. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or
immediately after, completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out the
low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into
adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when
acceptable to the Engineer.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000-Page 30

3.22 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: The Owner shall employ a concrete testing laboratory
to provide all laboratory testing services on the project and a concrete
technician to perform all quality control tests on concrete and materials used to
batch concrete. The testing agency employed shall meet the requirement of
ASTM E 329.
B. Such tests will be provided and paid for by the Owner, except that tests which
reveal non-conformance with the Specifications and all succeeding tests for the
same area, until conformance with the Specifications is established shall be at
the expense of the Contractor. The Owner will be responsible for paying for
only the successful tests.
C. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate facilities on the project for
the testing laboratory to locate the required testing equipment and for safe
storage area for test cylinders. The general contractor shall provide at his own
expense all casual labor needed to assist the concrete technician in obtaining
samples of concrete and concrete materials and moving and transporting
cylinders and materials which are being tested.
D. The following services shall be performed by the designated testing agency:
1. Review and/or check-test the Contractor's proposed materials for
compliance with the specifications.
2. Review and/or check-test the Contractor's proposed mix design as
required by the Engineer.
3. Secure production samples of materials at plants or stock piles during the
course of the work and test for compliance with the specifications.
4. Conduct strength tests of the concrete during construction in accordance
with the following procedures:
a. Secure composite samples in accordance with ASTM C 172. Each
sample shall be obtained from a different batch of concrete on a
random basis, avoiding any selection of the test batch other than by
a number selected at random before commencement of concrete
placement.
b. Mold and cure three specimens from each sample in accordance
with ASTM C 31. Any deviations from the requirements of this
Standard shall be recorded in the test report.
c. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 39. Two specimens
shall be tested at 28 days for acceptance and one shall be the
average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days. If
one specimen in a test manifests evidence of improper sampling,
molding or testing, it shall be discarded and the strength of the
remaining cylinder shall be considered the test result. Should both
specimens in the test show any of the above defects, the entire test
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000-Page 31

shall be discarded. When high early strength concrete is used, the
specimens shall be tested at the ages indicated in the Contract
Documents.
d. Make at least one strength test for each 50 cu. yd., or fraction
thereof, of each mix design of concrete placed in any I day. When
the total quantity of concrete with a given mix design is less than 50
cu. yd., the strength test may be waived by the Engineer if, in his
judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided,
such as strength test results for the same kind of concrete supplied
on the same day and under comparable conditions to other work or
other projects.
5. Determine slump of the concrete sample for each strength test and
whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, in accordance with
ASTM C 143.
6. Determine air content of normal weight concrete sample for each strength
test in accordance with either ASTM C 231, ASTM C 173, or ASTM C 138
as appropriate.
7. Determine unit weight of concrete sample for each strength test.
8. Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test.
9. Determine in-place strength of concrete by curing cylinders under the
same field conditions that the concrete representing these field cylinders is
cured and additionally by determining the degree/hours of curing required
for the concrete to develop the required strength for form removal.
10. Inspect concrete batching, mixing and delivery operations to the extent
deemed necessary by the Engineer.
11. Review the manufacturer's report for each shipment of cement.
E. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate log showing the following
information:
1. Date of pour
2. Area poured
3. Temperature at time of pour
4. Average ambient temperature during curing period
5. Date forms scheduled for removal
6. Date form removal completed
7. Method of reshoring (number of floor, etc.)
8. Test cylinder serial numbers
9. Strength of test cylinders at 7 and 28 days.
3.23 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES
A. The concrete quality control testing as specified will be evaluated by the
following criteria:
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000-Page 32

1. Compressive strength tests for laboratory-cured cylinders will be
considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive
compressive strength test results equal or exceed the 28 day design
compressive strength of the type of class of concrete; and, no individual
strength test falls below the required compressive strength by more than
500 psi. If compressive strength tests fail to meet these requirements, the
concrete represented by these tests will be considered deficient and
subject to additional testing and/or removal.
2. Concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements,
including strength, tolerance and finishes, shall be corrected as directed at
the Contractors expense, without extension of time therefor. The
Contractor shall also be responsible for the cost of corrections to any other
work affected by or resulting from correction to the concrete work. Core
tests, if required, shall be evaluated in accordance with the requirements
of ACI 318.
3. The testing agency shall further provide quality control inspection and
testing of materials used in concrete. The following inspection and tests
shall be on all equipment and materials on a random basis:
a. Fineness modulus and gradation of sand
b. Fineness modulus and gradation of coarse aggregate.
c. Colorimetric of sand.
d. Weight per cu. ft. and percent of voids on a dry rodded basis of the
coarse aggregate.
e. Check of aggregate stock piles for contamination or intermingling of
aggregates.
f. Check of mixing equipment and trucks for compliance with ASTM C
94.
g. Absorption of stone and sand.
3.24 LEAK TESTING OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES
A. All concrete structures which will retain water or wastewater under normal
operating conditions shall be filled with water prior to backfilling and final
exterior painting and tested for leaks. Unless otherwise specified by the
Engineer, the tank shall remain filled with water for a period of seven (7) days.
Any leaks, damp spots, or other defects found shall be repaired and made
water tight to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The first 48 hours of the test are
utilized to allow the concrete to absorb water. After the first 48 hours of the test,
the water level shall be noted and monitored for the remaining five (5) days. A
reduction in water greater than 0.1 percent per 24 hours shall be considered
excessive and shall constitute failure of the leak test. (NOTE: Rainfall and
evaporation must be considered duringcalculation of water loss. Rainfall shall
p
be added to and evaporation shall be deducted from the measured loss to
determine net liquid loss.)
July 2021 Project#19.00305 033000-Page 33

SECTION 099000 PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Modified General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes preparation of all surfaces to be painted, all field painting,
the repairs to the shop priming or finish coats of paint, and the furnishing and
installation of pipe markers, signs and similar items. In general, all equipment
furnished with standard shop finishes shall be field painted, except graphic
panels, electrical equipment, instruments, and similar items with baked-on
enamel finishes.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU — Concrete Masonry Unit
B. CSP — Concrete Standard Profile
C. DFT — Dry Film Thickness
D. ICRI — International Concrete Repair Institute
E. NACE — National Association of Corrosion Engineers
F. SF — Square Foot or Square Feet
G. SSPC — Steel Structures Painting Council (now known as the Society for
Protective Coatings)
H. °F — Degrees Fahrenheit
1.4 CONTRACTOR
A. The Contractor shall have five (5) years practical experience and successful
history in the application of specified products in similar projects. They shall
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 1

substantiate this requirement by furnishing a list of references and job
completions.
B. Applicator must successfully demonstrate to the product manufacturer the
ability to apply the material correctly and within the confines of the
specifications. The Contractor must provide a letter from the manufacturer
stating their acceptance of the Contactor for this project to apply these
products.
C. The Contractor shall be expected to provide tools and equipment in first class
working order.
D. All directions with respect to temperature, humidity, surface preparation, mixing
ratios, induction times, recoat times, and touch up procedures as set forth by
the manufacturer shall be adhered to exactly. Nothing in these specifications
shall be deemed to cancel or supersede the directions of the coatings
manufacturer, except where specific film thickness or spreading rates are set
forth. Deviations between these specifications and the manufacturer's
recommendations regarding film thickness shall be resolved utilizing the thicker
of the indicated coating thickness.
E. No additional compensation will be made for equipment required to maintain
proper environmental conditions (i.e. temperature, humidity) such as portable
heaters or dehumidifiers.
F. The Contractor shall be expected to provide and be familiar with the use of film
thickness gauges (wet and dry), holiday detectors, sling psychrometer, and
such other instruments or gauges or other equipment as may be required to
comply with the manufacturer's instructions.
G. The Contractor shall possess the applicable license(s) to perform the work as
herein described and as specified by Local, State and Federal laws. The
Contractor shall include his license number(s) on the front of the envelope
containing his bid.
H. The Contractor shall submit certification from the paint manufacturer indicating
that the quantity of each coating purchased was sufficient to properly coat all
surfaces. Such certification shall indicate square footage quantities provided to
the manufacturer and the Owner by the Contractor.
I. The Contractor shall provide a site mock up with each paint system as a
representative of how the systems shall be installed and their final appearance
(to include color, sheen, texture etc), which is to be approved by the Engineer
before any work is started. For overcoat projects this mock up shall be used to
test for adequate adhesion. This approved mock up shall be the quality
standard for the rest of the project. This mock up location, size and other job
specifics needs shall be detailed by the Engineer.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 2

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. All field painting shall be under the direct and complete control of the
Contractor and only skilled painters shall be used in the work. All paint
shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
and as directed. Film thickness of applied paint shall be at least equal to
the value determined by the number of coats multiplied by the thickness
per coat schedule on the plans for specific paint products. If other paint
products are approved, the thickness per coat shall be as determined by
the Engineer. A film thickness indicator will be used by the Engineer to
determine compliance with the specifications. When field coats of paint
are to be applied to shop painted or shop primed surfaces, care shall be
taken to insure that only compatible paints are used.
2. Pans or pails of adequate capacity shall be used for mixing paints or
similar materials. All paint shall be thoroughly stirred before being taken
from the containers and all ready mixed paint shall be applied exactly as
received from the manufacturer and no thinner or drier shall be added
except as specified, permitted or directed by the Engineer. Successive
coats of paint shall be tinted so as to make each coat easily
distinguishable from each other with the final undercoat tinted to the
approximate shade of the finished coat.
3. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly
manner so as to facilitate inspection. All materials that receive surface
preparation shall receive the primer application the same day that the
surface preparation is performed and before flash rusting occurs.
Surfaces of exposed members that will be inaccessible after erection shall
be cleaned and painted before erection.
4. In general, aluminum, stainless steel, copper, and bronze work shall not
be field painted. Care shall be taken not to paint shafts, grease fittings,
nameplates, machined parts, sight glasses, etc.
il
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 of
these specifications.
B. The Contractor shall submit a minimum of six (6) copies of complete shop
drawings to the Engineer for approval. Shop drawings shall include a coating
schedule, manufacturer's data sheets for all coatings, and color charts. All
colors shall be selected by the Owner.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000-Page 3

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All paint shall be manufactured by a reputable manufacturer with at least ten
(10) years experience in the manufacture of industrial grade coatings. Paint
shall be as manufactured by Carboline, Sherwin-Williams, Tnemec, or approved
equal.
B. General: Quality assurance procedures and practices shall be utilized to
monitor all phases of surface preparation, application, and inspection
throughout the duration of the project. Procedures or practices not specifically
defined herein may be utilized provided they meet recognized and accepted
professional standards and are approved by the Engineer.
C. Surface Preparation: Surface preparation will be based upon comparison with:
"Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces", SSPC Vis
1 and ASTM D 2200; "Standard Methods of Evaluating Degree of Rusting on
Painted Steel Surfaces" SSPC Vis 2 and ASTM D 610; "Visual Standard for
Surfaces of New Steel Air blast Cleaned with Sand Abrasive" or "Guideline for
Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coating
and Polymer Overlays" and ICRI 310.2 Surface Profile Replica Chips.
D. Application: No coating or paint shall be applied: When the surrounding air
temperature or the temperature of the surface to be coated is below the
minimum required temperature for the specified product; to wet or damp
surfaces or in fog or mist; when the temperature is less than 5 degrees F.
above the dew point; when the air temperature is expected to drop below 40
degrees F. within six hours after application of coating. Dew point shall be
measured by use of an instrument such as a Sling Psychrometer in conjunction
with U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychrometric Tables. If
above conditions are prevalent, coating or painting shall be delayed or
postponed until conditions are favorable. The day's coating or painting shall be
completed in time to permit the film sufficient drying time prior to damage by
atmospheric conditions. No coatings shall be applied in a dust-laden
environment.
E. Thickness and Holiday Checking: Thickness of coatings and paint shall be
checked with a non-destructive, magnetic type thickness gauge. The integrity
of coated interior surfaces shall be tested with an approved inspection device.
Non-destructive holiday detectors shall not exceed the voltage recommended
by the manufacturer of the coating system. All holiday testing shall be
conducted in accordance with NACE SP 0188. For thicknesses between 10
and 20 mils (250 microns and 500 microns), a non-sudsing type wetting agent,
such as Kodak Photo Flo, may be added to the water prior to wetting the
detector sponge. All pinholes shall be marked, repaired in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed recommendations, and retested. No pinholes or other
irregularities will be permitted in the final coating.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 4

F. Inspection Devices: The Contractor shall furnish, until final acceptance of
coating and painting, inspection devices in good working condition for detection
of holidays and measurement of dry film thickness of coating and paint. The
Contractor shall also furnish U.S. Department of Commerce; National Bureau of
Standard certified thickness calibration plates to test accuracy of dry film
thickness gauges and certified instrumentation to test accuracy of holiday
detectors.
G. All necessary testing equipment shall be made available for the Engineer's use
at all times until final acceptance of application. Holiday detection devices shall
be operated in the presence of the Engineer.
H. A NACE certified technical representative from the paint manufacturer shall visit
the job site to support the Contractor's personnel, the Owner and/or the
Engineer as needed and/or requested. Visits shall be made as needed help to
assure the quality of the materials and workmanship.
1.8 SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUIREMENTS
A. General: In accordance with requirements set forth by regulatory agencies
applicable to the construction industry and manufacturer's printed instructions
and appropriate technical bulletins and manuals, the Contractor shall provide
and require use of personnel protective lifesaving equipment for persons
working on or about the project site.
B. Head and Face Protection and Respiratory Devices: Equipment shall include
protective helmets, which shall be worn by all persons while in the vicinity of the
work. In addition, workers engaged in or near the work during sandblasting
shall wear eye and face protection devices and air purifying halfmask or
mouthpiece respirators with appropriate filters. Barrier creams shall be used on
any exposed areas of skin.
C. Ventilation: Where ventilation is used to control hazardous exposure, all
equipment shall be explosion proof. Ventilation shall reduce the concentration
of air contaminant to the degree a hazard does not exist. Air circulation and
exhausting of solvent vapors shall be continued until coatings have fully cured.
D. Sound Levels: Whenever the occupational noise exposure exceeds maximum
allowable sound levels, the Contractor shall provide and require the use of
approved ear protective devices.
E. Illumination: Adequate illumination shall be provided while work is in progress,
including explosion proof lights and electrical equipment. Illumination of the
work area shall be in accordance with SSPC Technology Guide No. 12 "Guide
for Illumination of Industrial Painting Projects" for general work, surface
preparation application and inspection.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 5

F. Confined Space: When applicable it is mandatory that all work be performed in
compliance with OSHA'S rules and regulations for working in confined space.
Atmospheres within confined spaces as defined by the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration are classified as being either a Class A, Class B or Class
C environment.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All materials to be used in the work, including paints, stains, varnishes, thinners,
etc. shall be delivered to the site in their original unbroken containers. All
ingredients shall be prepared, packed, labeled, and guaranteed by the
manufacturer. All materials shall be stored in enclosed structures to protect
them from weather and excessive heat or cold. Flammable coatings or paint
must be stored in accordance with the requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Materials exceeding storage life recommended by the
manufacturer or not stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions shall
be rejected.
B. Paint storage space shall be kept clean at all times and every precaution shall
be taken to avoid fire hazards.
C. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas
with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 50°F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and
residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. The work covered by this Section shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1)
year from the date of final acceptance against defective materials and faulty
workmanship. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of
the work during the guaranty period, the affected work shall be repaired or
replaced promptly at the expense of the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. All products shall be from a single manufacturer. Although the coatings listed in
the general paint schedule include products from several manufacturers for the
purpose of specifying the type of coating system, a single manufacturer shall be
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 6

selected by the Contractor for all products throughout the project. All paint
products shall be as manufactured by Carboline, Sherwin-Williams, Tnemec, or
approved equal.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Provide material for use within a selected paint system that are compatible with
one another and the substrates indicated, under the conditions of service and
application as recommended by manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
B. All finish colors except as noted in this Specification for Pipelines shall be
selected by the Owner prior to application by the Contractor. Color chips shall
be submitted to the Engineer for color selection. From time to time, as the
Engineer may direct analyses of paint and oil, or pigment samples may be
made and any samples that are found not complying with these specifications
may be cause for rejection of the paint. The cost of the analyses and the cost
of supplying paint that complies with these specifications shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All surface preparation, coating and painting shall conform to applicable
standards of the Steel Structures Painting Council, NACE, ICRI and the
manufacturer's printed instructions. Material applied prior to approval of the
surface by the Engineer shall be removed and reapplied to the satisfaction of
the Engineer at the expense of the Contractor.
B. All work shall be performed by skilled craftsmen qualified to perform the
required work in a manner comparable with the best standards of practice.
Continuity of personnel shall be maintained and transfers of key personnel shall
be coordinated with the Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall provide an English speaking supervisor at the work site at
all times.
D. Dust, dirt, oil, grease or any foreign matter that will affect the adhesion or
durability of the finish must be removed by washing with clean rags dipped in an
approved cleaning solvent and wiped dry with clean rags.
E. The Contractor's coating and painting equipment shall be designed for
application of materials specified and shall be maintained in first class working
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 7

condition. Compressors shall have suitable traps and filters to remove water
and oils from the air.
F. Application of the first coat shall follow immediately after surface preparation
and cleaning and before rust bloom or flash rusting occurs. Any cleaned areas
not receiving first coat within this period shall be recleaned prior to application
of first coat.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for temperature, maximum moisture content and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
B. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared as specified below and shall be
clean and dry before painting. The maximum moisture content of substrates
when measured with an electronic moisture meter shall be as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent
4. Plaster: 12 percent
5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility
with existing finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and surfaces are clean and dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of
substrates and conditions.
3.3 CONTAINMENT AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS DEBRIS AND/OR PAINT
CHIPS (AS NECESSARY)
A. All work shall be in accordance with OSHA Safety & Health Standards 29 CFR
1910.1025.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible to make provisions to contain any cleaning
residue and/or old paint to within the property and the required containment.
Blast cleaning operations shall not begin until the containment method is
approved by the Owner's representative.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 8

C. All debris and blast related media shall be collected at the end of each workday.
All debris shall be placed in approved containers for proper disposal.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all permits, disposal, and costs required
for the disposal of any and all debris generated as part of this contract.
Contractor shall take positive steps to ensure that solid and hazardous waste
including used solvent and solvent rags is separated from other debris.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and paying for the certified
laboratory test report to determine if the residue generated during the blasting
and paint removal operations on the structure exceeds "leachable" limits for
lead, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, mercury, selenium, and silver as
determined by EPA's Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP). A
copy of the certified report shall be furnished to the Engineer.
F. The Contractor shall sandblast a representative area and collect the debris
generated. The Contractor shall also collect a representative sample of old
paint chips from the structure. Samples shall be collected in the presence of
the Owner or Engineer and sent to a laboratory for analysis. The Contractor
shall furnish the Engineer a certified test report of the Toxicity Characteristic
Leaching Procedure (TCLP) documenting the results of a representative
random sample taken from the debris and paint chips. The certified report shall
state that the results are for the specific job. Should the result exceed any of
the EPA maximum limits, the Contractor shall apply for an EPA identification
number for a generator of hazardous waste on Notification Form 8700 12.
Application and disposal of debris generated shall be through the appropriate
local, state or federal officials.
G. Should the results of the certified test be less than the EPA maximum limit the
Contractor shall dispose of the debris generated in an approved landfill as
directed by Environmental Control and the appropriate local, state or federal
officials.
H. If lead is present, the entire structure shall be totally contained with a rigid
containment system. Submit a detailed plan for Lead Abatement Plan to
conform to OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1910.1025. Provide a containment system
which allows for the efficient containment of environmentally sensitive waste,
dust, fumes, and paint debris that will be generated during the blasting
operations. The containment systems must be a proven method used
previously on similar projects with acceptable results. The Contractor shall
comply with the following:
1. Provide a containment system that meets the requirements of SSPC
Guide 61 for Class 3 containment with Class A-2 Flexible Walls, Class B-1
Impermeable Walls, Class C-2 Flexible Supports, Class D-1 Full Joint
Seals, Class E-2 Entryway with Overlapping Door, Class G-1 Forced Air
Flow, and Class J-1 Exhaust Dust Filtration.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000-Page 9

2. Contractor must submit a written containment and collection of debris
plan.
3. The containment must be designed and erected in such a manner that no
damaging loads are imposed by the containment and collection systems
of the structure to be painted.
4. The containment system will be evaluated by ambient air monitoring for
lead. Samples will be taken at three different locations based around the
site. Emissions of lead may not exceed a time weight average of 5
micrograms per cubic meter outside the containment. The Contractor may
not continue blasting until initial test results indicating that emissions are
below the allowable limit are conveyed to the Engineer.
5. Provide ventilation as described below:
a. The Contractor must provide forced air ventilation during all coating
removal, debris removal, and painting operation performed on the
structure.
b. The ventilation by forced air system must be sufficient to provide
adequate visibility and limit worker lead dust exposure. The
minimum required ventilation shall be 40,000 CFM. Should worker
exposure to lead dust become excessive or visibility drop to an
unacceptable level, then reconfiguration of the ventilation system
requiring the use of flexible and/or rigid duct work and additional
forced air ventilation capacity shall be required.
c. All ventilation equipment shall be explosion proof.
d. The exhaust ventilation system will be evaluated by ambient air
monitoring. Emissions above a time weighted average of 5
micrograms per cubic meter shall be cause for blasting operation
shut down and reevaluation of the exhaust and ventilation system.
Modifications to the containment shall be made until compliance is
achieved.
3.4 PREPARATION
A. All parties, to include the Owner, Engineer, Contractor, installer, any subs and
the product manufacture, shall meet prior to any work is started to review the
specification and discuss job specific expectations, needs and requirements.
B. Comply with all manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations
applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
C. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or
weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation
and painting.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 10

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades
involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied
protection if any.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment
name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
D. Clean all substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including
dirt, debris, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible
primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.
E. All surface preparation shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the
surface preparation specifications of the Steel Structures Painting Council and
NACE.
1. Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP1): Removal of oil, grease, soil and other
contaminants by use of solvents, emulsions, cleaning compounds, steam
cleaning or similar materials and methods which involve a solvent or
cleaning action. This standard is an integral part of all other standards,
shall precede any other surface preparation described herein, and is not
required to be referenced separately.
2. Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP2): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale
and other detrimental foreign matter to degree specified by hand chipping,
scraping, sanding and wire brushing.
3. Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP3): Removal of loose rust' loose mill scale
and other detrimental foreign matter to degree specified by power wire
brushing, power impact tools or power sanders.
4. Brush-Off Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP7/NACE 4): Brush-off blast cleaned
surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil,
grease, dirt, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose coating. Tightly
adherent mill scale, rust, and coating may remain on the surface. Mill
scale, rust, and coating are considered tightly adherent if they cannot be
removed by lifting with a dull putty knife after abrasive blast cleaning has
been performed.
5. Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP6/NACE 3): Blast cleaning until at
least 66 percent of unit area is free or all visible residues.
6. Near White Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP10/NACE 2): Blast cleaning to nearly
white metal cleanliness, until at least 95 percent of unit area is free of all
visible residues.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000-Page 11

7. Surface Preparation of Concrete (SSPC-SP13/NACE 6): This standard
gives requirements for surface preparation of concrete by mechanical,
chemical, or thermal methods prior to the application of bonded protective
coating or lining systems.
8. Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal (SSPC-SP11): This standard covers
the requirements for power tool cleaning to produce a bare metal surface
and to retain or produce a minimum 25 micrometer (1.0 mil) surface
profile. This standard is suitable where a roughened, clean, bare metal
surface is required, but where abrasive blasting is not feasible or
permissible.
F. Blast cleaning for all surfaces shall be by dry method unless otherwise directed.
G. Particle size of abrasives used in blast cleaning shall be that which will produce
a 1.5 — 2.0 mil (37.5 microns - 50.0- microns) surface profile or in accordance
with recommendations of the manufacturer of the specified coating or paint
system to be applied.
H. Abrasive used in blast cleaning operations shall be new, washed, graded and
free of contaminants that would interfere with adhesion of coating or paint and
shall not be reused unless specifically approved by the Engineer.
I. During blast cleaning operations, caution shall be exercised to insure that
surrounding existing coatings or paint are not exposed to abrasion from blast
cleaning.
J. The Contractor shall keep the area of his work and the surrounding
environment in a clean condition. He shall not permit blasting materials to
accumulate as to constitute a nuisance or hazard to the accomplishment of the
work, the operation of the existing facilities, or nuisance to the surrounding
environment.
K. Blast cleaned surfaces shall be cleaned prior to application of specified coatings
or paint. No coatings or paint shall be applied over damp or moist surfaces.
L. Specific Surface Preparation: Surface preparation for the specific system shall
be as specified herein.
3.5 APPLICATION
A. All paints shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions based on the materials being coated and their exposure conditions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 12

2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items
with prime coat only.
B. Protective coverings or drop cloths shall be used to protect floors, fixtures, and
equipment. Care shall be exercised to prevent coatings or paint from being
spattered onto surfaces that are not to be coated or painted. Surfaces from
which materials cannot be removed satisfactorily shall be recoated or repainted
as required to produce a finish satisfactory to the Engineer.
C. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if
multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match
color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to
distinguish each separate coat.
D. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats
until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
E. Each application of coating or paint shall be applied evenly, free of brush
marks, sags, runs, with no evidence of poor workmanship. Care shall be
exercised to avoid lapping on glass or hardware. Coatings and paints shall be
sharply cut to lines. Finished surfaces shall be free from defects or blemishes.
All coats herein specified are in addition to shop or other coats specified to be
applied by other trades.
F. All welds, edges and other irregular surfaces shall receive a brush coat of the
specified product prior to application of the first complete coat.
G. All items listed below shall be painted unless specifically noted otherwise.
Items which come from the manufacturer completely painted shall be given a
single coat of machinery enamel or shall be "touched-up" only as directed by
the Engineer.
H. Where appropriate, all solvent vapors shall be completely removed by suction
type exhaust fans and blowers before placing in operating service.
I. Unless otherwise directed by Engineer, all exposed pipelines and equipment
shall be painted and identified as follows:
Item Color
Equipment & Pumps Imperial Blue
Water Lines
Raw or Recycled Water Olive Green
Settled or Clarified Aqua
Finished or Potable Water Dark Blue
Non-Potable Water Light Gray With Yellow Band
Chemical Lines
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 13
1

Alum or Primary Coagulant Orange
Ammonia White
Carbon Slurry Black
Caustic Yellow with Green Band
Chlorine (Gas and Solution) Yellow
Chlorine Dioxide Yellow with Violet Band
Fluoride Light Blue with Red Band
Lime Slurry Light Green
Ozone Yellow with Orange Band
Phosphate Compounds Light Green with Red Band
Polymers or Coagulant Aids Orange with Green Band
Potassium Permanganate Violet
Soda Ash Light Green with Orange Band
Sulfuric Acid Yellow with Red Band
Sulfur Dioxide Light Green with Yellow Band
All PVC Chemical Lines Unpainted with Stenciled Labels
Waste Lines
Backwash Waste Light Brown
Sludge Dark Brown
Sewer (Sanitary or Other) Dark Gray
Other
Chlorine Gas Safety Yellow
Compressed Air Dark Green
Natural Gas Safety Red
J. All exposed pipes shall have stenciled arrows pointing in the direction of flow,
with fluid labels every 10'-0" or at convenient locations.
K. General:
1. In general, equipment previously shop painted with the Manufacturer's
standard paint system shall be repainted with colors to suit the area of
installation. The Engineer may, at his option, require that certain
equipment not be painted. The Contractor shall verify that all field
coatings are compatible with the shop coatings.
2. Imperfections and scratches on equipment not repainted shall be touched
up with matching paint provided by the Equipment Manufacturer.
3. Where more than one coat of paint is required, the undercoats shall be a
shade lighter than succeeding coats to insure complete coverage.
4. Colors shall be as selected by the Owner.
5. Aluminum and stainless steel surfaces shall not be painted unless
specifically indicated in the specifications or drawings.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 14

6. All pipes and other metals that have been dipped in tar or bituminous
products shall receive two (2) coats of an anti-bleeding sealer in place of
priming coat.
7. Bronze and brass shall not be painted unless specifically required or
requested by the Engineer. Galvanized metal and the other metals, which
require painting shall receive one (1) coat of a vinyl wash primer before
prime painting.
3.6 PAINT SCHEDULE
A. NOTE: Contractor shall select all coating systems for the entire project from a
single manufacturer. Approved equal systems may be utilized if approved by
the Engineer.
B. Masonry:
1. All interior and exterior exposed concrete block walls above and below
grade shall be painted.
a. Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, no cracks or nail heads.
b. Coating system:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Sanitile 600 Carboguard 890 Carbothane 133 HB
(at 60-70 SF/gallon) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Cement-Plex 875 Macropoxy 646 Macropoxy 646
(at 75 SF/gallon) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Series 607 Prime-A- Series 607 Conformal
Tnemec Pell Plus(at 75-100 Stain N/A
SF/Gallon) (at 75-100 SF/Gallon)
C. Exterior Concrete:
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP13/NACE6 Surface Preparation of
Concrete. Power wash with 5,000 psi using the rotating "turbo" nozzle, to
remove all loose paint, dirt, dust, mildew and all other foreign matter. The
surface must be clean and dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Sanitile 600 Carboguard 890 Carbothane 133 HB
(at 60-70 SF/gallon) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)
Loxon Conditioner Loxon XP Loxon XP
Sherwin-Williams A24-100(at 200-300 (at 6.4-8.3 mils DFT) (at 6.4-8.3 mils DFT)
SF/Gallon)
Tnemec Series 151 Elasto-Grip Series 156 Enviro-Crete Series 156 Enviro-Crete
(at 0.7-1.5 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 15

D. Interior Concrete:
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP13/NACE6 Surface Preparation of
Concrete, ICRI CSP 3. The surface must be clean and dry before
painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Sanitile 600 Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890
(at 60-70 SF/gallon) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Kern Cati Coat Epoxy Pro Industrial HB Water Pro Industrial HB Water
Sherwin-Williams filler B42 Series (at 10.0- Based Catalyzed Epoxy Based Catalyzed Epoxy
20.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Tnemec Series 1254 EpoxoBlock Series 27WB Typoxy Series 27WB Typoxy
(at 75 SF/Gal) (at 4.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-8.0 mils DFT)
E. Concrete Floors: (All new concrete floors shall be coated gray unless otherwise
indicated.)
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP13/NACE6 Surface Preparation of
Concrete, ICRI CSP 3. The surface must be clean and dry before
painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Carboguard 1340 WB Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890
(at 1.5-2.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Corobond 100 Cor-Cote HP Cor-Cote HP
(at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT)
Series 201 Epoxoprime Series 281 Tneme- Series 247 UVX
Tnemec (at 8.0-12.0 mils DFT) Glaze (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)
(at 8.0-12.0 mils DFT)
F. Concrete (Potable or Non-Potable Immersion):
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP13/NACE6 Surface Preparation of
Concrete, ICRI CSP 5. The surface must be clean and dry before
painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Carboguard 510 Carboguard 891 Carboguard 891
(at 1/8 inch) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) _
Sherwin-Williams Corobond 300(at Macropoxy 646 PW Macropoxy 646 PW
(at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Series 218 MortarClad Series N140 Pota-Pox Series N140 Pota-Pox
Tnemec (at 1/8 inch) Plus Plus
(at 4.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-8.0 mils DFT)
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 16

G. Concrete (Wastewater Immersion):
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP13/NACE6 Surface Preparation of
Concrete, ICRI CSP 5. The surface must be clean and dry before
painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Carboguard 510 Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890
(at 1/8 inch) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Corobond 300(at Corcote SC Plus(at 40.0- Corcote SC Plus(at
125.0 mils DFT) 40.0-125.0 mils DFT)
Series 434 Perma-Sheild
Series 218 MortarClad Series 435 Perma-Glaze
Tnemec H2S
(at 1/8 inch) (at 120.0-125 0 mils DFT) (at 15.0-20.0 mils DFT)
H. Exposed Steel:
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6/NACE3 Commercial blast cleaning. The
surface must be clean and dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Carboguard 890 Carbothane 133 HB N/A
(at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Corothane 1 Mio Zinc Macropoxy 646 FC WB Acrolon 100
(at 3.0-4.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-4.0 mils DFT)
Tnemec Series 1 Omnithane Series 27WB Typoxy Series 740 UVX
(at 2.5-3.5 mils DFT) (at 4.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)
I. Steel (Potable or Non Potable Immersion):
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10/NACE2 Near-white blast cleaning with a
minimum angular anchor profile of 2.0 mils. The surface must be clean
and dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Carboguard 60 Carboguard 891 Carboguard 891
(at 4.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Corothane I Galvapac Macropoxy 646 PW Macropoxy 646 PW
(at 3.0-4.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Series 1 Omnithane (at Series N140 Pota-Pox Series N140 Pota-Pox
Tnemec 2.5-3.5 mils DFT) Plus Plus
(at 4.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-8.0 mils DFT)
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 17

J. Steel (Wastewater Immersion):
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10/NACE2 Near-white blast cleaning with a
minimum angular anchor profile of 2.0 mils. The surface must be clean
and dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Carboguard 60 Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890
(at 4.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams N/A SherGlass FF SherGlass FF
(at 8.0-20.0 mils DFT) (at 8.0-20.0 mils DFT)
Series 1 Omnithane (at Series 446 Perma-Shield Series 446 Perma-
Tnemec 2.5-3.5 mils DFT) MCU Shield MCU
(at 5.0-10.0 mils DFT) (at 5.0-10.0 mils DFT)
K. Exposed Galvanized Steel:
1. Surface Preparation: Remove all soluble and insoluble contaminants and
corrosion. Remove any storage stains per Section 6.2 of ASTM D6386.
Sweep (Abrasive) Blasting per ASTM D 6386 to achieve a uniform anchor
profile (1.0 - 2.0 mils).
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Rustbond Carbothane 133 HB Carbothane 133 HB
(at 1.0-2.0 mils DFT) (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT) (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 FC WB Acrolon 100 N/A
(at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-4.0 mils DFT)
Tnemec Series 27WB Typoxy Series 740 UVX N/A
(at 4.0-8.0 mils DFT) (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)
L. Interior Drywall:
1. Surface Preparation: The surface must be clean and dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Sanitile 120 Carbocrylic 3359 Carbocrylic 3359
(at 1.0-2.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)
PrepRite 200 Water-Based Tile Clad Pro Industrial HB Water
Sherwin-Williams Based Catalyzed Epoxy
(at 1.0-2.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Series 151 Elasto-Grip Series 113 Tneme- Series 113 Tneme-
Tnemec (at 0.7-1.5 mils DFT) Tufcoat Tufcoat
(at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 18

M. Wood:
1. Surface Preparation: The surface must be clean and dry before painting.
2. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish
Manufacturer
Carboline Sanitile 120 Carbocrylic 3359 Carbocrylic 3359
(at 1.0-2.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams PrepRite DTM Acrylic Coating DTM Acrylic Coating
(at 1.5-2.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)
Tnemec Series 10 Tnemec Primer Series 1028 Enduratone Series 1028 Enduratone
(at 2.0-3.5 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT) (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)
3. Finish: Semi-Gloss
N. Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pipe, Valves, and Fittings (above and below grade)
1. Interior (above grade)
a. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale; blast clean per
SSPC-SP5/NACE1 White blast cleaning with a minimum of 3.0 mils
of surface profile. Surface must be clean and dry before painting.
b. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Final
Manufacturer
Carboline Carboguard 60(at 4.0 mils DFT) Carbothane 133 HB(at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646(at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT) Macropoxy 646 (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)
Tnemec Series 431 Prima-Shield PL Series 431 Prima-Shield PL
(at 40.0 mils DFT) (at 40.0 mils DFT)
2. Exterior (below grade)
a. Surface Preparation: None.
b. Paint system: Manufacturer's factory paint system as specified
elsewhere.
3. Exterior (submerged)
a. Surface Preparation: Blast clean per SSPC-SP10 clean and dry
(except galvanized steel piping). Surface profile requirements shall
be as recommended on manufacturer's product data sheets.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 19

b. Coating System:
System First/Prime Second/Intermediate
Manufacturer
Carboline Carboguard 890 (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) Carboguard 890(at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646(at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT) Macropoxy 646 (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)
Tnemec Series 431 Prima-Shield PL Series 431 Prima-Shield PL
(at 40.0 mils DFT) (at 40.0 mils DFT)
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following
procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the
period when paints are being applied:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample
paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site
will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with
product requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show
materials being used do not comply with product requirements.
Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site,
pay for testing, and repaint surfaces which were painted with rejected
materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from
previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the
two paints are incompatible.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other
discarded materials from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Coating or paint
spots and oil or stains on adjacent surfaces shall be removed and the jobsite
cleaned. All damage to surfaces resulting from the work of this section shall be
cleaned, repaired, or refinished to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no cost to
the Owner.
C. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. All staging, scaffolding,
and containers shall be removed from the site.
D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct
damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and
refinishing, as approved by Engineer, and leave in an undamaged condition.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000—Page 20

E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.9 SPARE PAINT
A. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) gallon of all types and colors of paint to the
Owner for future touch-up painting.
END OF SECTION 099000
July 2021 Project#19.00305 099000-Page 21
1

SECTION 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Copper building wire.
2. Connectors and splices.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control
systems communications cables and Classes 1, 2, and 3 control cables.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances.
B. VFC: Variable-frequency controller.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 260519-Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying
conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.
B. Standards:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,
and marked for intended location and use.
2. RoHS compliant.
3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking
according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."
C. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and
with ASTM B496 for stranded conductors.
D. Conductor Insulation:
1. Type TC-ER: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 1277.
2. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.
3. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.
E. Shield:
1 . Type TC-ER: Cable designed for use with VFCs, with oversized
crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus 85 percent
coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire, and sunlight-
and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity
rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and
labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and use.
B. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, all steel
or malleable iron, electro zinc plated and chromate coated, insulated-throat,
with angled, screw-secured mechanical saddle clip, designed to connect cables
specified in this Section. Provide Thomas & Betts Tite-Bite Connectors or
approved equal
C. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this
Section.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 260519- Page 2

1 . Material: Tin-plated Copper.
2. Type: Two hole with long barrels.
3. Termination: Compression.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders:
1. Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
B. Branch Circuits:
1. Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and
larger.
C. VFC Output Circuits Cable: Extra-flexible stranded for all sizes.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE
APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces:
Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions:
1. In office, laboratory, toilet rooms and similar administrative type spaces:
Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
2. Do not conceal branch circuits in industrial process areas. An exposed
wiring method shall be utilized.
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and
Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 260519- Page 3

1. When using tray cable, enclose in conduit between cable tray and point of
connection to equipment being served.
H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord
with stainless steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit
application.
I. VFC Output Circuits: Type TC-ER cable with braided shield.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points
according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems"
prior to pulling conductors and cables.
C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary;
compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure
values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave
wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
E. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIRE-ALARM WIRE AND CABLE
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 260529
"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited
conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with
or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train
conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are
terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with fire-alarm
system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring
diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs,
pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes;
cabinets; or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 260519- Page 4

SECTION 260529 SYSTEMS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
'I
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel slotted support systems.
2. Conduit and cable support devices.
3. Support for conductors in vertical conduit.
4. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including mechanical
expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts,
and hanger rods.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products
and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic
criteria.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for the following:
a. Slotted support systems, hardware, and accessories.
b. Clamps.
c. Hangers.
d. Sockets.
e. Eye nuts.
f. Fasteners.
g. Anchors.
h. Saddles.
i. Brackets.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 260529-Page 1

2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation details for electrical hangers and
support systems.
1. Hangers. Include product data for components.
2. Slotted support systems.
3. Equipment supports.
4. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages
and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include
adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on
actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of
gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the supported equipment and systems will
remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the
seismic forces specified and the supported equipment and systems will be
fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.
2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with
minimum 13/32-inch-diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c. in at least
one surface.
1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 260529- Page 2

2. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Stainless steel, Type 316.
3. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria.
4. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Stainless steel, steel and malleable-iron
hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of
raceway or cable to be supported.
C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly
consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for
nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have
number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit
individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable
iron.
D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening
electrical items or their supports to facility surfaces include the following:
1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for
use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and
pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials
where used.
2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are
similar to MSS Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are
suitable for attached structural element.
4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325.
5. Toggle Bolts: Stainless-steel springhead type.
6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation
requirements of hangers and supports, except where requirements on Drawings
or in this Section are stricter:
1. NECA 1.
2. NECA 101
B. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to an
applicable detail in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 260529-Page 3

C. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533
"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
D. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways:
Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its
Table 1 lists maximum spacings that are less than those stated in NFPA 70.
Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
E. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel
slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least
25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit
clamps.
F. Provide stainless steel conduit supporting, mounting, anchoring and attachment
components and devices in chemical buildings.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as
specified in this article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT
IMC and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members,
according to NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static
loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for
strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components:
Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to facility structural
elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and
expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27),
complying with MSS SP-69.
6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces:
Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures,
pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 260529-Page 4

channel racks attached to substrate by means that comply with seismic-
restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that
avoid the need for reinforcing bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and
equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches
larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum
of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
B. Use 4000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials,
reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 033000
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows:
1 . Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment
manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with items to be embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed
areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as
used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up
field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0
mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 260529- Page 5

SECTION 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits and fittings.
2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.
3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical
Systems" for exterior ductbanks, handholes, and underground utility
construction.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures. Include plans, elevations, sections,
and attachment details.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 260533- Page 1

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for enclosures, cabinets, and conduit
racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components,
from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on
actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of
gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on
which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
B. Source quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Metal Conduit:
1. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
3. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
4. FMC: Comply with UL 1; aluminum.
5. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
B. Metal Fittings:
1. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
3. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.
4. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with
UL 1203 and NFPA 70.
5. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Type: Compression with hexagonal locknuts.
c. Other: Insulated throat.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 260533- Page 2

6. Fittings for FMC: Steel or malleable iron, electro zinc plated and chromate
g
coated, insulated-throat, with angled, screw-secured mechanical saddle
clip. Provide Thomas & Betts Tite-Bite Connectors or approved equal.
C. Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities
having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to
lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance
their conductivity.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Nonmetallic Conduit:
1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduit shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
2. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.
B. Nonmetallic Fittings:
1. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.
2. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type
and material.
a. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.
3. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.
2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1,
Type 4X, stainless steel and Type 12 to match requirements for boxes and
enclosures at the location installed, unless otherwise indicated, and sized
according to NFPA 70.
1 . Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location
and application.
B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion
joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and
mate with wireways as required for complete system.
C. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 260533- Page 3

D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish, except provide no finish where
stainless steel is utilized.
2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes,
enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet
locations.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy,
Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
E. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire
weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing
more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.
F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and
UL 1773, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.
H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same
material as recessed box.
I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep.
J. Gangable boxes are prohibited.
K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 4X,
stainless steel with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 260533- Page 4

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried or concrete
encased as indicated on the drawings.
a. Where directional bore is indicated, provide continuous HDPE.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250
a. Small Junction, Outlet and Device Boxes: Cast Iron.
b. Larger Boxes and Enclosures: Type 4X, stainless steel.
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed: GRC.
2. Exposed and Subject to Corrosion: RNC. Raceway locations include the
following:
a. Chemical storage, mixing, metering and handling areas.
b. Areas specifically identified on the drawings.
3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except
use LFMC in damp or wet locations and in chemical buildings.
5. Boxes and Enclosures:
a. Finished areas: NEMA 250, Type 1
b. Non-finished areas (process, mechanical and electrical): NEMA 250,
Type 4.
1) Small Junction, Outlet and Device Boxes: Cast Iron.
2) Larger Boxes and Enclosures: Type 4X, stainless steel.
c. Areas of High Corrosion: Match raceway materials, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit
fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
E. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg
F.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 260533-Page 5

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.
B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where
requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102
for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways
allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
C. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof.
D. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or
hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
E. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
F. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished
slab.
G. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run
except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support
within 12 inches of changes in direction.
H. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall
be according to NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment
specifically designed for material and size involved.
I. General Conduit and Boxes Installation:
1. Interior finished spaces including but not necessarily limited to offices,
control rooms, laboratories, toilets, conference rooms, office storage
rooms and other similar locations:
a. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Interior process, mechanical and electrical spaces:
a. Exposed conduit and boxes, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Exterior locations:
a. Conceal all raceway and boxes serving lighting, receptacles, HVAC
equipment and similar devices and equipment at the exterior walls of
buildings.
b. Exposed all other conduit and boxes, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building and construction lines.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 260533- Page 6

J. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
K. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1 . Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to
main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit
close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-
foot intervals.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building and structure expansion joints at right
angles with expansion fittings.
3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all
directions.
4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved
by Engineer for each specific location.
L. Stub-Ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1 . Use EMT for raceways.
2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not
terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.
M. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor
Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before
making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and
outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings
on service conduits.
O. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with
locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures.
Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to
assure a continuous ground path.
Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and
larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the
length.
R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic
line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack
at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare
above grade alongside raceways in use.
S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70
and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install
each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 260533-Page 7

that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to
NFPA 70.
T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so
no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of
environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:
1. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
2. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building.
3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and
fittings.
V. Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where
environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has
straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground
RMC conduit that is located where environmental temperature change
may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100
feet.
2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change
listed for each of the following locations:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F
temperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F
temperature change.
c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical
Separation: 125 deg F temperature change.
3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041
inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for
PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for
at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of
temperature change for metal conduits.
4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or
structure expansion joints.
5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston
setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for
conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit
supports to allow for expansion movement.
W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 36
inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires,
equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for
transformers and motors.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 260533- Page 8

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are
not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements.
Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of
masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces
to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate
or supported equipment and box.
Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not
in the same vertical channel.
AA. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
BB. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning
two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the
purpose.
CC. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not
support boxes by conduits.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit.
Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for
pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work
toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with
expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process.
Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting
strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished
grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete
backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth
Moving."
4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and
equipment and at building entrances through floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this
purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a
minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling.
b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and
where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit
horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 260533-Page 9

equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on
terminations at equipment.
5. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL
PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall
assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve
Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to an
applicable detail in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended
by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 260533- Page 10

SECTION 262213 LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes distribution, dry-type transformers with a nominal primary and
secondary rating of 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of
transformer.
2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum
clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type
and size of transformer.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location
and size of each field connection.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages
and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for transformers, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on
actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of
gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262213-Page 1

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
4. Certification: Indicate that equipment meets Project seismic requirements.
B. Source quality-control reports.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inspection: On receipt, inspect for and note any shipping damage to packaging
and transformer.
1. If manufacturer packaging is removed for inspection, and transformer will
be stored after inspection, re-package transformer using original or new
packaging materials that provide protection equivalent to manufacturer's
packaging.
B. Storage: Store in a warm, dry, and temperature-stable location in original
shipping packaging.
C. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written
instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods
during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a
space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.
D. Handling: Follow manufacturer's instructions for lifting and transporting
transformers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. ABB (Electrification Products Division).
2. Eaton.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262213-Page 2

3. Schneider Electric USA (Square D).
B. Other Manufacturers: Other manufacturers will be considered if request for
approval to supply products is received by the Engineer not later than fourteen
days before the receipt of bids. Other approved manufacturers will be named
by addendum prior to receipt of bids.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single
manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Transformers shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the transformer will remain in place without
separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and
the transformer will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2.3 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and use.
C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:
1. Comply with 10 CFR 431 (DOE 2016) efficiency levels.
2. Marked as compliant with DOE 2016 efficiency levels by an NRTL.
D. Shipping Restraints: Paint or otherwise color-code bolts, wedges, blocks, and
other restraints that are to be removed after installation and before energizing.
Use fluorescent colors that are easily identifiable inside the transformer
enclosure.
2.4 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NFPA 70, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified
in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
July 2021 Project#19.00305 262213-Page 3

C. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low
hysteresis losses.
1. One leg per phase.
2. Core volume shall allow efficient transformer operation at 10 percent
above the nominal tap voltage.
3. Grounded to enclosure.
D. Coils: Continuous windings except for taps.
1. Coil Material: Aluminum.
2. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
3. Terminal Connections: Welded.
E. Encapsulation: Transformers smaller than 30 kVA shall have core and coils
completely resin encapsulated.
F. Enclosure (Indoor Applications): Ventilated.
1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin
compound using a vacuum-pressure impregnation process to seal out
moisture and air.
2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on
auxiliary fans.
3. Wiring Compartment: Sized for conduit entry and wiring installation.
4. Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
a. Finish Color: Gray weather-resistant enamel.
G. Enclosure (Outdoor Applications): Ventilated.
1. NEMA 250, Type 3R: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin
compound, sealing out moisture and air.
2. Wiring Compartment: Sized for conduit entry and wiring installation.
3. Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
a. Finish Color: Gray weather-resistant enamel.
H. Taps for Transformers 3 kVA and Smaller: None.
I. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5
percent tap below normal full capacity.
J. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two
2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262213-Page 4

K. Insulation Class, Smaller Than 30 kVA: 180 deg C, UL-component-recognized
insulation system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient
temperature.
L. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized
insulation system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient
temperature.
M. Grounding: Provide ground-bar kit or a ground bar installed on the inside of the
transformer enclosure.
N. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-
width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
1 . Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling
between input and output terminals.
2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield.
O. Neutral: Rated 200 percent of full load current for K-factor-rated transformers.
P. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets or, when required by seismic
loading, wall brackets fabricated from design drawings signed and sealed by a
licensed structural engineer.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-acrylic, melamine plastic or stainless steel
signs for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant
screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and
IEEE C57.12.91.
1. Resistance measurements of all windings at rated voltage connections
and at all tap connections.
2. Ratio tests at rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.
3. Phase relation and polarity tests at rated voltage connections.
4. No load losses, and excitation current and rated voltage at rated voltage
connections.
5. Impedance and load losses at rated current and rated frequency at rated
voltage connections.
6. Applied and induced tensile tests.
7. Regulation and efficiency at rated load and voltage.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262213- Page 5

8. Insulation-Resistance Tests:
a. High-voltage to ground.
b. Low-voltage to ground.
c. High-voltage to low-voltage.
9. Temperature tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature
requirements for each transformer.
B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances
required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting
conditions where transformers will be installed.
D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Environment:
Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-mounted transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated
by transformer manufacturer or, when required by seismic loadings, from
design drawings signed and sealed by a licensed structural engineer.
1. Coordinate installation of wall-mounted and structure-hanging supports
with actual transformer provided.
2. Brace wall-mounted transformers as specified in Section 260548.16
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B. Install transformers level and plumb on a concrete base with vibration-
dampening supports. Locate transformers away from corners and not parallel to
adjacent wall surface.
C. Construct concrete bases according to Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" and anchor floor-mounted transformers according to manufacturer's
written instructions, seismic codes applicable to Project, and requirements in
Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262213-Page 6

1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer
provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement,
and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.
D. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended
torques to reduce noise generation.
F. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems."
B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and
supports to eliminate sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized
service representative.
B. Small (Up to 167-kVA Single-Phase or 500-kVA Three-Phase) Dry-Type
Transformer Field Tests:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection.
a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
c. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets
have been removed.
d. Verify the unit is clean.
e. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests recommended by
manufacturer.
f. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262213- Page 7

g. Verify the presence of surge arresters and that their ratings are as
specified.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Measure resistance at each winding, tap, and bolted connection.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each
winding-to-ground. Apply voltage according to manufacturer's
published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data,
comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.5. Calculate polarization index:
the value of the index shall not be less than 1.0.
c. Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions. Test results shall not
deviate by more than one-half percent from either the adjacent coils
or the calculated ratio. If test fails, replace the transformer.
d. Verify correct secondary voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-
neutral, after energization and prior to loading.
C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as
specified above.
D. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an
infrared scan of transformer connections.
1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of
device calibration.
2. Perform two follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at four months
and the other at 11 months after Substantial Completion.
3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing
results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.
E. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated
and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of
typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage
conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding
nameplate voltage plus 5 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage
minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings
as test results.
B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and
tap settings.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262213-Page 8

3.6 CLEANING
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
END OF SECTION 262213
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262213- Page 9

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 262416 PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance testing specification.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection.
D. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
E. SPD: Surge protective device.
F. VPR: Voltage protection rating.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.
1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs,
accessories, and components indicated.
2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features,
performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1 . Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262416- Page 1

2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor
termination sizes, equipment features, and ratings.
3. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental
protection, knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets,
hinges, and locks.
4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective
devices.
6. Include evidence of NRTL listing for SPD as installed in panelboard.
7. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.
8. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
9. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.
10. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Include selectable
ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Include an Internet
link for electronic access to downloadable PDF of the coordination curves.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items
specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the
following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent
protective devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of
overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 262416-Page 2

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or ISO 9002 certified.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install
temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations:
1 . Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period.
2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions
unless otherwise indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F to plus 104
deg F.
b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1 , usual service conditions, as follows:
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.
C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service
according to requirements indicated:
1 . Notify Owner no fewer than 14 days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Engineer's or
Owner's written permission.
3. Comply with NFPA 70E.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262416- Page 3

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial
Completion.
B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace SPD that fails in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1 . SPD Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic
forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum
dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and
adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum
dimensions.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
D. Comply with NEMA PB 1 .
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
F. Enclosures: Flush and Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. Provide ratings
for panelboards as indicated below, unless noted otherwise.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1 .
b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel..
c. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
d. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping
Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
2. Height: 84 inches maximum.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262416- Page 4

3. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted
fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. Trims
shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.
4. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard
enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel
sections.
5. Finishes:
a. Panels and Trim: Galvanized steel, factory finished immediately
after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat,
baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.
G. Incoming Mains:
1. Location: As required for application, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
a. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length.
2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and
protective devices shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the
main bus connectors.
3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment
grounding conductors; bonded to box.
4. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service
entrance applications. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure. Do not
mount neutral bus in gutter.
I. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg C rated conductors without
derating.
3. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter
space, if required, for larger conductors.
4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type, with a lug on the neutral bar
for each pole in the panelboard.
5. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type, with a
lug on the bar for each pole in the panelboard.
J. NRTL Label: Panelboards or load centers shall be labeled by an NRTL
acceptable to authority having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one
or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 262416-Page 5

K. Future Devices: Panelboards shall have mounting brackets, bus connections,
filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of
devices.
1. Percentage of Future Space Capacity: 25 percent.
L. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical
short-circuit current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100
percent interrupting capacity.
1 . Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated 240 V or less shall
have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than
10,000 A rms symmetrical.
2. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated above 240 V and
less than 600 V shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but
not less than 14,000 A rms symmetrical.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1 . The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic
forces specified."
B. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated
panelboards, complying with UL 1449 SPD Type 2.
2.3 POWER PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. ABB (Electrification Products Division).
2. Eaton.
3. Schneider Electric USA (Square D).
B. Other Manufacturers: Other manufacturers will be considered if request for
approval to supply products is received by the Engineer not later than fourteen
days before the receipt of bids. Other approved manufacturers will be named
by addendum prior to receipt of bids.
C. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262416- Page 6

D. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1 . For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
E. Mains: Circuit breaker or Main Lugs only, as indicated.
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A
and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger
Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. ABB (Electrification Products Division).
2. Eaton.
3. Schneider Electric USA (Square D).
B. Other Manufacturers: Other manufacturers will be considered if request for
approval to supply products is received by the Engineer not later than fourteen
days before the receipt of bids. Other approved manufacturers will be named
by addendum prior to receipt of bids.
C. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1 , lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
D. Mains: Circuit breaker or Main Lugs only, as indicated.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable
without disturbing adjacent units.
F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed
alike.
2.5 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD'S)
A. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand
rating per phase shall not be less than 100 kA. The peak surge current rating
shall be the arithmetic sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given
mode.
B. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V,
three-phase, four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262416- Page 7

1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.
2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.
4. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V.
C. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120 V,
three-phase, four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:
1. Line to Neutral: 700 V for 208Y/120 V.
2. Line to Ground: 700 V for 208Y/120 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 700 V for 208Y/120 V.
4. Line to Line: 1200 V for 208Y/120 V.
D. SCCR: Equal to the SCCR of the panelboard in which installed.
E. Inominal Rating: 20 kA.
2.6 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:
a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads.
b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A
and larger.
2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with
Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).
3. GFEP Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).
4. MCCB Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status.
c. UL listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load
ratings.
d. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and
conductor materials.
e. Application Listing: Appropriate for application.
f. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with
adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and
ground-fault indicator.
g. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip
at 75 percent of rated voltage.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262416-Page 8

h. Electronic Trip Unit: Three-pole breakers with ampere ratings greater
than 150 amperes shall have electronic (LSIG) adjustable trip units
with zone protective interlocking connections.
i. Auxiliary Contacts: One, SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a"
contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in
reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.
j. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker
operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off
position.
k. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for
interlocking protection function with other upstream or downstream
devices.
I. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing with a single handle or
factory assembled to operate as a single unit.
m. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-
breaker handle in on or off position.
2.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage,
number of phases, and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the
panelboard door.
B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification
standards, and AIC rating.
C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in metal
frame with transparent protective cover.
1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to
distinguish it from all other circuits.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards
to verify that equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum
required clearances specified in NFPA 70.
B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged,
rusted, or have been subjected to water saturation.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262416- Page 9

D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other
construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical
and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace
clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace
clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Comply with NECA 1.
C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
D. Equipment Mounting:
1. For panelboards with ratings greater than 800 A, install on cast-in-place
concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment
bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
2. For both floor and wall mounted panelboards, attach to the vertical
finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.
3. Comply with requirements for seismic control devices specified in
Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and
brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
F. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in
Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
G. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
H. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.
I. Mount surface-mounted panelboards to steel slotted supports 5/8 inch in depth.
Orient steel slotted supports vertically.
J. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory
installed.
1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 262416-Page 10

2. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using
calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written
instructions.
K. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately
derived systems to ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes,
separate grounds for isolated ground bars, and connections to separate ground
bars.
L. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
M. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space
or space designated to be ceiling space in the future.
N. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;
install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final
room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories
are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying
with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
D. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test for low-
voltage air circuit breakers and low-voltage surge arrestors stated in
July 2021 Project#19.00305 262416-Page 11

NETA ATS, Paragraph 7.6 Circuit Breakers and Paragraph 7.19.1 Surge
Arrestors, Low-Voltage. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare
reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more
than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of
each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are
accessible to portable scanner.
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared
scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial
Completion.
c. Instruments and Equipment:
1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal
values. Provide calibration record for device.
D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies
panelboards included and that describes scanning results, with comparisons of
the two scans. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken,
and observations after remedial action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and
lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Prior to energizing panelboards, apply temporary heat to
maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 262416
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262416- Page 12

SECTION 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fusible switches.
2. Nonfusible switches.
3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
4. Enclosures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and
component indicated. Include nameplate ratings, dimensioned elevations,
sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance,
electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
5. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and
rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each
type of overcurrent protective device. Provide in PDF electronic format.
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 262816-Page 1

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
2. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for enclosed switches and circuit
breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on
actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of
gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed
switches and circuit breakers.
b. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and
rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for
each type of overcurrent protective device. Provide in PDF electronic
format.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but
no fewer than three of each size and type.
2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262816-Page 2

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the
following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding
104 deg F.
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace
components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand
the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic
forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic
event."
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent
protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product
category, from single manufacturer.
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum
dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances
between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with
indicated maximum dimensions.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and
application.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262816- Page 3

2.3 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. ABB (Electrification Products Division).
2. Eaton.
3. Schneider Electric USA (Square D).
B. Other Manufacturers: Other manufacturers will be considered if request for
approval to supply products is received by the Engineer not later than fourteen
days before the receipt of bids. Other approved manufacturers will be named
by addendum prior to receipt of bids.
C. Type HD, Heavy Duty:
1. Single or Double throw, as indicated.
2. Three pole.
3. 240 or 600-V ac, as indicated or required for the application.
4. 1200 A and smaller.
5. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to
accommodate indicated fuses.
6. Lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked
with cover in closed position.
D. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and
aluminum ground conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R
fuses are specified.
4. Auxiliary Contact Kit, where indiated: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary
contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. Contact rating
- 120-V ac.
5. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor
material.
6. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment, where
indicated or required for the application.
2.4 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. ABB (Electrification Products Division).
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262816- Page 4

2. Eaton.
3. Schneider Electric USA (Square D).
B. Other Manufacturers: Other manufacturers will be considered if request for
approval to supply products is received by the Engineer not later than fourteen
days before the receipt of bids. Other approved manufacturers will be named
by addendum prior to receipt of bids.
C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac (as
indicated), 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated,
lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with
cover in closed position.
D. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and
aluminum ground conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R
fuses are specified.
4. Auxiliary Contact Kit, where indicated: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary
contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. Contact rating
- 120-V ac.
5. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor
material.
2.5 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. ABB (Electrification Products Division).
2. Eaton.
3. Schneider Electric USA (Square D).
B. Other Manufacturers: Other manufacturers will be considered if request for
approval to supply products is received by the Engineer not later than fourteen
days before the receipt of bids. Other approved manufacturers will be named
by addendum prior to receipt of bids.
C. Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass-reinforced insulating material.
Current carrying components shall be completely isolated from the handle and
the accessory mounting area.
D. Circuit breakers shall have a toggle operating mechanism with common tripping
of all poles, which provides quick-make, quick-break contact action. The circuit-
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262816-Page 5

breaker handle shall be over center, be trip free, and reside in a tripped position
between on and off to provide local trip indication. Circuit-breaker escutcheon
shall be clearly marked on and off in addition to providing international I/O
markings. Equip circuit breaker with a push-to-trip button, located on the face of
the circuit breaker to mechanically operate the circuit-breaker tripping
mechanism for maintenance and testing purposes.
E. The maximum ampere rating and UL, IEC, or other certification standards with
applicable voltage systems and corresponding interrupting ratings shall be
clearly marked on face of circuit breaker. Circuit breakers shall be 100 percent
rated.
F. MCCBs shall be equipped with a device for locking in the isolated position.
G. Lugs shall be suitable for 167 deg F rated wire.
H. Standard: Comply with UL 489 with interrupting capacity to comply with
available fault currents.
I. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current thermal element for
low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
J. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Provide electronic trip unit for circuit-breakers
for sizes larger than 150 A or, for lower ratings, where specifically indicated on
the drawings. Trip units shall be equipped with zone protective interlocking
connections. Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-
adjustable settings:
1. Instantaneous trip.
2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I-squared t response.
K. Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole
configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).
L. Ground-Fault Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B
ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).
M. Features and Accessories:
1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and
conductor material.
3. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-
powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and
July 2021 Project#19.00305 262816-Page 6
a-

shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current
transformer/sensor.
4. Communication Capability: Universal-mounted communication module
with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control
system, specified in Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and
Control."
5. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing
contact.
6. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a"
contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of
circuit-breaker contacts.
7. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation;
key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
8. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for
interlocking ground-fault protection function.
2.6 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: UL 489, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and
UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
B. Enclosure Finish: The enclosure shall be finished with gray baked enamel paint,
electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphatized steel (NEMA 250 Type 1); gray
baked enamel paint, electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphatized galvannealed
steel (NEMA 250 Types 3R, 12); a brush finish on Type 304 stainless steel
(NEMA 250 Type 4-4X stainless steel); or copper-free cast aluminum alloy
(NEMA 250 Types 7, 9).
C. Conduit Entry: NEMA 250 Types 4, 4X, and 12 enclosures shall contain no
knockouts. NEMA 250 Types 7 and 9 enclosures shall be provided with
threaded conduit openings in both endwalls.
D. Operating Mechanism: The circuit-breaker operating handle shall be externally
operable with the operating mechanism being an integral part of the box, not
the cover. The cover interlock mechanism shall have an externally operated
override. The override shall not permanently disable the interlock mechanism,
which shall return to the locked position once the override is released. The tool
used to override the cover interlock mechanism shall not be required to enter
the enclosure in order to override the interlock.
E. Enclosures designated as NEMA 250 Type 4, 4X stainless steel, 12, or 12K
shall have a dual cover interlock mechanism to prevent unintentional opening of
the enclosure cover when the circuit breaker is ON and to prevent turning the
circuit breaker ON when the enclosure cover is open.
F. NEMA 250 Type 7/9 enclosures shall be furnished with a breather and drain kit
to allow their use in outdoor and wet location applications.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 262816- Page 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit
breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
1. Commencement of work shall indicate Installer's acceptance of the areas
and conditions as satisfactory.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service
according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than 14 days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Engineer's or
Owner's written permission.
4. Comply with NFPA 70E.
3.3 ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTAL RATING APPLICATIONS
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Provide enclosures at installed
locations with the following environmental ratings.
1. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel..
3. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
4. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless
steel.
5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive
Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
6. Indoor Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7 with
cover attached by Type 316 stainless steel bolts.
7. Outdoor Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 8 with
cover attached by Type 316 stainless steel bolts.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 262816-Page 8

3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components
with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace
clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform
height unless otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in
Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and
brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and
components.
E. Install fuses in fusible devices.
F. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;
provide warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with laminated-plastic nameplate.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized
service representative.
C. Tests and Inspections for Switches:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
c. Verify that the unit is clean.
d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and
mechanical operation.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262816- Page 9

e. Verify that fuse sizes and types match the Specifications and
Drawings.
f. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact
integrity.
g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of
the two following methods:
1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.
a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of
similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from
those of similar bolted connections by more than 50
percent of the lowest value.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with
manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12.
a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with
manufacturer's published data. In the absence of
manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS
Table 100.12.
h. Verify that operation and sequencing of interlocking systems is as
described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings.
i. Verify correct phase barrier installation.
j. Verify lubrication of moving current-carrying parts and moving and
sliding surfaces.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a
low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance
values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that
deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50
percent of the lowest value.
b. Measure contact resistance across each switchblade fuseholder.
Drop values shall not exceed the high level of the manufacturer's
published data. If manufacturer's published data are not available,
investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar
switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
c. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole,
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with switch closed, and across
each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's
published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use
Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of insulation
July 2021 Project#19.00305 262816- Page 10

resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as
recommended in manufacturer's published data.
d. Measure fuse resistance. Investigate fuse-resistance values that
deviate from each other by more than 15 percent.
e. Perform ground fault test according to NETA ATS 7.14 "Ground Fault
Protection Systems, Low-Voltage."
D. Tests and Inspections for Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1 . Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Verify that equipment nameplate data are as described in the
Specifications and shown on the Drawings.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
d. Verify that the unit is clean.
e. Operate the circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.
f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of
the two following methods:
1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.
a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of
similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from
those of similar bolted connections by more than 50
percent of the lowest value.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with
manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12.
a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with
manufacturer's published data. In the absence of
manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS
Table 100.12.
g. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and chutes in unsealed
units.
h. Perform adjustments for final protective device settings as indicated.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a
low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance
values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that
deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50
percent of the lowest value.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262816- Page 11

b. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole,
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with circuit breaker closed, and
across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with
manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's
published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate
values of insulation resistance less than those published in
Table 100.1 or as recommended in manufacturer's published data.
c. Perform a contact/pole resistance test. Drop values shall not exceed
the high level of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's
published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from
adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the
lowest value.
d. Perform insulation resistance tests on all control wiring with respect
to ground. Applied potential shall be 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable
and 1000-V dc for 600-V rated cable. Test duration shall be one
minute. For units with solid state components, follow manufacturer's
recommendation. Insulation resistance values shall be no less than
two megohms.
e. Determine the following by primary current injection:
1) Long-time pickup and delay. Pickup values shall be as
specified. Trip characteristics shall not exceed manufacturer's
published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including
adjustment factors.
2) Short-time pickup and delay. Short-time pickup values shall be
as specified. Trip characteristics shall not exceed
manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance
band, including adjustment factors.
3) Ground-fault pickup and time delay. Ground-fault pickup values
shall be as specified. Trip characteristics shall not exceed
manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance
band, including adjustment factors.
4) Instantaneous pickup. Instantaneous pickup values shall be as
specified and within manufacturer's published tolerances.
f. Test functionality of the trip unit by means of primary current
injection. Pickup values and trip characteristics shall be as specified
and within manufacturer's published tolerances.
g. Perform minimum pickup voltage tests on shunt trip and close coils
in accordance with manufacturer's published data. Minimum pickup
voltage of the shunt trip and close coils shall be as indicated by
manufacturer.
h. Verify correct operation of auxiliary features such as trip and pickup
indicators; zone interlocking; electrical close and trip operation; trip-
free, anti-pump function; and trip unit battery condition. Reset all trip
logs and indicators. Investigate units that do not function as
designed.
July 2021 Project# 19.00305 262816-Page 12

i. Verify operation of charging mechanism. Investigate units that do not
function as designed.
3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
4. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare
reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more
than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of
each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so
joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared
scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after
date of Substantial Completion.
c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device
designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations
from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
5. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace
damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do
not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
1. Test procedures used.
2. Include identification of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker tested
and describe test results.
3. List deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after
remedial action.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly and
lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges to values as indicated.
END OF SECTION 262816
July 2021 Project#19.00305 262816-Page 13

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 312300 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. General:
1. The work covered by this section shall consist of furnishing all materials,
labor, equipment and services for the excavation and backfill at all areas
within the limits of the project. Work is limited to the areas of construction
and includes (but is not necessarily limited to) stockpiling of topsoil, site
grading, excavation of footings and trenches, filling, backfilling,
compaction, finish grading, spreading of topsoil, disposal of waste
material, and proof rolling.
2. Perform all excavation, dewatering, sheeting, bracing, and backfilling in
such a manner as to eliminate all possibility of undermining or disturbing
the foundations of existing structures.
3. Requirements of the General and Supplemental Conditions apply to all
work in this section. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services
indicated on the drawings, or specified herein, or reasonably necessary
for or incidental to a complete job.
4. Excavations shall provide adequate working space and clearances for the
work to be performed therein and for installation and removal of concrete
forms. In no case shall excavation faces be undercut for extended
footings.
5. Subgrade surfaces shall be clean and free of loose material of any kind
when concrete is placed thereon.
6. Backfilling during freezing weather shall not be done except by
permission of the Engineer. No backfill, fill, or embankment materials
shall be installed on frozen surfaces, nor shall frozen materials, snow, or
ice be placed in any backfill, fill, or embankment.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Excavation, General: Excavation consists of the removal and disposal of all
materials encountered for footings, foundations, pipework, and other
construction as shown on the drawings. Perform all excavation work in
compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, all referenced standards
shall be the latest edition available at the time of bidding. Any requirements of
July 2021 Project#19.00305 312300-Page 1

these specifications shall in no way invalidate the minimum requirements of the
referenced standards. Comply with the provisions of the following codes and
standards, except as otherwise shown or specified.
1. ASTM C33: Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregate
2. ASTM D698: Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of
Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5 lb. Rammer and 12" Drop.
3. ASTM D3282: Standard Recommended Practice for Classification of
Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes.
4. Standard Specifications for Roads and Structures, North Carolina
Department of Transportation, March 1, 2006 edition.
5. Erosion and Sediment Control Planning and Design Manual.
B. Unauthorized Excavation: Except where otherwise authorized, indicated, or
specified, all materials excavated below the bottom of concrete walls, footings,
slabs on grade, and foundations shall be replaced, by and at the expense of the
Contractor, with concrete placed at the same time and monolithic with the
concrete above.
C. Existing Utilities:
1. Locate existing underground utilities in the area of work. If utilities are to
remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork
operations.
2. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be
encountered during excavation, consult the Engineer immediately for
directions as to procedure. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies
in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair
damaged utilities to the satisfaction of utility companies.
1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: No test borings or related subsurface information is available
for the project area. Test borings and other exploratory operations may be
undertaken by the Contractor at his own expense provided such operations are
acceptable to the Owner.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Classification of Excavated Materials: Classification of excavated materials will
be made as follows:
1. All materials excavated for this project, regardless of its nature or
composition shall be classified as Unclassified Excavation, and shall be
July 2021 Project#19.00305 312300-Page 2

part of the lump sum price. No separate payment will be made for the
excavation of rock or any unsuitable materials.
B. Classification of Other Materials:
1. Satisfactory Subqrade Soil Materials: Soils complying with ASTM D
3282, soil classification Groups A-I, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3.
2. Unsatisfactory Subgrade Soil Materials: Soils described in ASTM D
3282, soil classification groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7; also
peat and other highly organic soils, unless otherwise acceptable to the
Engineer.
3. Cohesionless Soil Materials: Gravels, sand-gravel mixtures, sands, and
gravelly-sands.
4. Cohesive Soil Materials: Clayey and silty gravels, sand-clay mixtures,
gravel-silt mixtures, clayey and silty sands, sand-silt mixtures, clays,
silts, and very fine sands.
5. Backfill and Fill Materials: Provide satisfactory soil materials for backfill
and fill, free of masonry, rock, or gravel larger than 4" in any dimension,
and free of metal, gypsum, lime, debris, waste, frozen materials,
vegetable, and other deleterious matter. Use only excavated material
that has been sampled, tested, and certified as satisfactory soil material.
6. Select Backfill: Select backfill is defined as backfill and fill material that is
transported to the site from outside the project limits, and which meets
the soil requirements specified above under "Backfill and Fill Materials."
Material excavated in conjunction with the construction of this project
cannot be considered as "select backfill" for payment purposes.
7. Pipe Bedding: Crushed stone or crushed gravel meeting the
requirements of ASTM C 33, Gradation 67.
8. Inundated Sand: Sand for inundated sand backfill shall be clean with not
more than 25% retained on a No. 4 sieve and not more than 7% passing
a No. 200 sieve and shall have an effective size between 0.10 mm and
0.30 mm. Sand shall be deposited in, or placed simultaneously with
application of, water so that the sand shall be compacted by a
mechanical probe type vibrator. Inundated sand shall be compacted to
70% relative density as determined by ASTM D4253 and D4254.
9. Graded Gravel: Gravel for compacted backfill shall conform to the
following gradation:
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
1" 100
3/4" 85 - 100
3/8" 50 - 80
No. 4 35 - 60
No. 40 15 - 30
No. 200 05 - 10
July 2021 Project#19.00305 312300-Page 3

The gravel mixture shall contain no clay lumps or organic matters. The fraction
passing the No. 4 sieve shall have a liquid limit not greater than 25 and a
plasticity index not greater than 5. Gravel backfill shall be deposited in uniform
layers not exceeding 12" in uncompacted thickness. The backfill shall be
compacted by a suitable vibratory roller or platform vibrator to not less than
70% relative density as determined by ASTM D4253 and D4254.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Mechanical Excavation:
1. The use of mechanical equipment will not be permitted in locations where
its operation would cause damage to trees, buildings, culverts, or other
existing property, utilities, or structures above or below ground. In all
such locations, hand excavating methods shall be used.
2. Mechanical equipment used for trench excavation shall be of a type,
design, and construction and shall be controlled, that uniform trench
widths and vertical sidewalls are obtained at least from an elevation one
foot above the top of the installed pipe to the bottom of the trench, and
that trench alignment is such that pipe when accurately laid to specified
alignment will be centered in the trench with adequate clearance between
the pipe and sidewalls of the trench. Undercutting the trench sidewall to
obtain clearance will not be permitted.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Dewatering:
1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate dewatering
equipment to remove and dispose of all surface water and groundwater
entering excavations, trenches, or other parts of the work. Each
excavation shall be kept dry during subgrade preparation and continually
thereafter until the structure to be built, or the pipe to be installed therein,
is completed to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic pressure,
flotation, or other cause will result.
2. All excavations for concrete structures or trenches that extend down to or
below groundwater shall be dewatered by lowering and keeping the
groundwater level beneath such excavations 12" or more below the
bottom of the excavation.
3. Surface water shall be diverted or otherwise prevented from entering
excavated areas or trenches without causing damage to adjacent
property.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 312300-Page 4

4. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining any required permits or
permissions necessary for the disposal of groundwater that is removed.
Any discharged groundwater shall be clean and free of sediment.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of any pipe or
conduit which he may use for drainage purposes, and all such pipes or
conduits which he may use for drainage purposes, and all such pipes or
conduits shall be left clean and free of sediment.
6. Where trench sheeting is left in place, such sheeting shall not be braced
against the pipe, but shall be supported in a manner which will preclude
concentrated loads or horizontal thrusts on the pipe. Cross braces
installed above the pipe to support sheeting may be removed after pipe
embedment has been completed.
B. Stabilization:
1. Subgrades for concrete structures and trench bottoms shall be firm,
dense, and thoroughly compacted and consolidated; free from mud and
muck; and sufficiently stable to remain firm and intact under the feet of
the workmen.
2. Subgrades for concrete structures or trench bottoms, which are otherwise
solid but which become mucky on top due to construction operations,
shall be reinforced with one or more layers of crushed rock or gravel.
The stabilizing material shall be spread and compacted to a depth of not
less than 6" below the bottom of the structure or pipe. Not more than 1/2"
depth of mud or muck shall be allowed to remain on stabilized trench
bottoms when the pipe bedding material is placed thereon. The finished
elevation of stabilized subgrades for concrete structures shall not be
above subgrade elevations indicated on the drawings.
C. Cutting Concrete or Asphalt Surface Construction:
1. All pavement cutting and repair shall be done in accordance with local
ordinances. Cuts in concrete and asphaltic concrete shall be no larger
than necessary to provide adequate working space for proper installation
of pipe and appurtenances. Cutting shall be performed with a concrete
saw in a manner which will provide a clean groove the complete
thickness of the surface material along each side of the trench and along
the perimeter of cuts for structures.
2. Concrete and asphaltic concrete over trenches excavated for pipelines
shall be removed so that a shoulder not less than 12" in width at any
point is left between the cut edge of the surface and the top edge of the
trench. Trench width at the bottom shall not be greater than at the top
and no undercutting will be permitted. Cuts shall be made to and
between straight or accurately marked curved lines which, unless
otherwise required, shall be parallel to the center line of the trench.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 312300-Page 5

3. Pavement or other surfaces removed for connections to existing lines or
structures shall not be of greater extent that necessary for the installation.
4. Where the trench parallels the length of concrete walks and the trench
location is all or partially under the walk, the entire walk shall be removed
and replaced. Where the trench crosses drives, walks, curbs, or other
surface construction, the surface construction shall be removed and
replaced between existing joints or between saw cuts as specified for
payment.
D. Site Grade:
1. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section,
including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finish the surface within
specified tolerances; compact with uniform levels or slopes between
points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing
grades.
2. Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory
soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground
surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break up sloped
surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material will
bond with existing surface. Shape the subgrade as indicated on the
drawings by forking, furrowing, or plowing so that the first layer of new
material placed thereon will be well bonded to it.
3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Alignment, Grade, and Minimum Cover:
1. Vertical and horizontal alignment of pipes, and the maximum joint
deflection used in connection therewith, shall be in conformity with
requirements of the section covering installation of pipe.
2. Where pipe grades or elevations are not definitely fixed by the contract
drawings, trenches shall be excavated to a depth sufficient to provide a
minimum depth of backfill cover over the top of the pipe cover depths
may be necessary on vertical curves or to provide necessary clearance
beneath existing pipes, conduits, drains, drainage structures, or other
obstructions encounteredn i r at normal l a pipe grades. Measurement of pipe
cover depth shall be made vertically from the outside top of pipe to
finished ground or pavement surface elevation except where future
surface elevations are indicated on the drawings.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 312300-Page 6

B Limiting Trench Widths: Trenches shall be excavated to a width that will provide
adequate working space and sidewall clearances for proper pipe installation,
jointing, and embedment. For the purposes of quantity measurements and
payments, maximum trench widths shall be no greater than the pipe outside
diameter plus 24" (12" either side of pipe).
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Protection: Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and
other facilities from damages caused by settlement, lateral movement,
undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
B. Sheeting and Bracing: Make all excavations in accordance with Federal, State,
and Local health and safety rules and regulations, including those promulgated
by the Department of Labor, Occupation Safety and Health Administration,
"Safety and Health Regulations for Construction". Furnish, put in place, and
maintain such sheeting, bracing, etc., as may be necessary to support the sides
of the excavation to comply with the above mentioned rules and regulations.
C. Blasting:
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by blasting
operations. Suitable methods shall be employed to confine all materials
lifted by blasting within the limits of the excavation or trench.
2. All rock which cannot be handled and compacted as earth shall be kept
separate from other excavated materials and shall not be mixed with
backfill or embankment materials except as specified or directed.
D. Care and Restoration of Property:
1. Enclose the trunks of trees which are to remain adjacent to the work with
substantial wooden boxes of such height as may be necessary to protect
them from piled material, equipment or equipment operation. Use
excavating machinery and cranes of suitable type and operate the
equipment with care to prevent injury to remaining tree trunks, roots,
branches and limbs.
2. Do not cut branches, limbs, and roots except by permission of the
Engineer. Cut smoothly and neatly without splitting or crushing. In case
of cutting or unavoidable injury to branches, limbs, and trunks of trees,
neatly trim the cut or injured portions and cover with an application of
grafting wax and tree healing paint as directed.
3. Protect by suitable means all cultivated hedges, shrubs and plants that
might be injured by the Contractor's operations. Promptly heel in any
such trees or shrubbery necessary to be removed and replanted.
Perform heeling in and replanting under the direction of a licensed and
experienced nurseryman. Replant in their original position all removed
July 2021 Project#19.00305 312300-Page 7

shrubbery and trees after construction operations have been substantially
completed and care for until growth is reestablished.
4. Replace cultivated hedges, shrubs, and plants injured to such a degree
as to affect their growth or diminish their beauty or usefulness, by items
of kind and quality at least equal to the kind and quality existing at the
start of the work.
5. Do not operate tractors, bulldozers or other power-operated equipment
on paved surfaces if the treads or wheels of the equipment are so shaped
as to cut or otherwise injure the surfaces.
6. Restore all surfaces, including lawns, grassed, and planted areas that
have been injured by the Contractor's operations, to a condition at least
equal to that in which they were found immediately before the work was
begun. Use suitable materials and methods for such restoration.
Maintain all restored plantings by cutting, trimming, fertilizing, etc., until
acceptance. Restore existing property or structures as promptly as
practicable and do not leave until the end of construction period.
E. Protection of Streams: Exercise reasonable precaution to prevent the silting of
streams. Provide at Contractor's expense temporary erosion and sediment
control measures to prevent the silting of streams and existing drainage
facilities. The Contractor shall size structures and conform fully with the North
Carolina Sedimentation Pollution Control Act.
F. Air Pollution:
1. Comply with all pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances, and
statutes which apply to any work performed under the Contract, including
any air pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances and statutes, or
any municipal regulations pertaining to air pollution.
2. During the progress of the work, maintain the area of activity, including
sweeping and sprinkling of streets as necessary, so as to minimize the
creation and dispersion of dust. If the Engineer decides that it is
necessary to use calcium chloride or more effective dust control, furnish
and spread the material, as directed, and without additional
compensation.
3.4 TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. Length of Trench:
1. No more trenches shall be opened in advance of pipe laying than is
necessary to expedite the work. One block or 400 feet (whichever is the
shorter) shall be the maximum length of open trench on any line under
construction.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 312300-Page 8

2. Except where tunneling is indicated on the drawings, is specified, or is
permitted by the Engineer, all trench excavation shall be open cut from
the surface.
B. Trench Excavation:
1. General: Perform all excavation of every description and of whatever
substance encountered so that the pipe can be laid to the alignment and
depth shown on the drawings.
2. Brace and shore all trenches, where required, in accordance with
Federal, State, and Local health and safety rules and regulations,
including those promulgated bythe Department of Labor, Occupation
Safety and Health Administration, "Safety and Health Regulations for
Construction".
3. Make all excavations by open cut unless otherwise specified or indicated
on the drawings.
4. Width of Trenches: Excavate trenches sufficiently wide to allow proper
installation of pipe, fittings and other materials. Measurement and
payment quantities will be based on a maximum trench width of not more
than 12" clear of pipe on either side at any point. Do not widen trenches
by scraping or loosening materials from the sides.
5. Trench Excavation in Earth: Earth excavation includes all excavation of
whatever substance encountered. In locations where pipe is to be
bedded in earth excavated trenches, fine grade the bottoms of such
trenches to allow firm bearing for the bottom of the pipe on undisturbed
earth. Where any part of the trench has been excavated below the grade
of the pipe, fill the part excavated below such grade with pipe bedding
material and compact at the Contractor's expense.
6. Trench Excavation in Fill: If pipe is to be laid in embankments or other
recently filled material, first place the fill material to the finish grade or to a
height of at least one foot above the top of the pipe, whichever is the
lesser. Take particular care to ensure maximum consolidation of material
under the pipe location. Excavate the pipe trench as though in
undisturbed material.
7. Trench Bottom in Poor Soil: Excavate and remove unstable or unsuitable
soil to a width and depth, as directed by the Engineer, and refill with a
thoroughly compacted gravel bedding.
8. Bell Holes: Provide bell holes at each joint to permit the joint to be made
properly and to provide a continuous bearing and support for the pipe.
C. Trench Backfill:
1. General: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, use
suitable material for backfill which was removed in the course of making
the construction excavations. Do not use frozen material for the backfill
and do not place backfill on frozen material. Remove previously frozen
July 2021 Project#19.00305 312300-Page 9

material before new backfill is placed. Start backfilling as soon as
practicable after the pipes have been laid, or the structures have been
built and are structurally adequate to support the loads, including
construction loads to which they will be subjected, and proceed until its
completion.
2. With the exception mentioned below in this paragraph, do not backfill
trenches at pipe joints until after that section of the pipeline has
successfully passed any specified tests required. Should the Contractor
wish to minimize the maintenance of lights, and barricades, and the
obstruction of traffic, he may, at his own risk, backfill the entire trench as
soon as practicable after installation of pipe, and the related structures
have acquired a suitable degree of strength. He shall, however, be
responsible for removing and later replacing such backfill, at his own
expense, should he be ordered to do so in order to locate and repair or
replace leaking or defective joints or pipe.
3. Material: The nature of the materials will govern both their acceptability
for backfill and the methods best suited for their placement and
compaction in the backfill. Both are subject to the approval of the
Engineer. Do not place stone or rock fragments larger than 4" in greatest
dimension in the backfill. Do not drop large masses of backfill material
into the trench in such a manner as to endanger the pipeline. Use a
timber grillage to break the fall of material dropped from a height of more
than 5 feet. Exclude pieces of bituminous pavement from the backfill
unless their use is expressly permitted.
4. Zone Around Pipe: Place bedding material to the level shown on the
Drawings and work material carefully around the pipe to ensure that all
voids are filled, particularly in bell holes. For backfill up to a level of 2 feet
over the top of the pipe, use only selected materials containing no rock,
clods or organic materials. Place the backfill and compact thoroughly
under the pipe haunches and up to the mid-line of the pipe in layers not
exceeding 6" in depth. Place each layer and tamp carefully and uniformly
so as to eliminate the possibility of lateral displacement. Place and
compact the remainder of the zone around the pipe and to a height of
one foot above the pipe in layers not exceeding 6" and compact to a
maximum density of at least 100 % as determined by ASTM D0698.
5. Tamping: Deposit and spread backfill materials in uniform, parallel layers
not exceeding 12" thick before compaction. Tamp each layer before the
next layer is placed to obtain a thoroughly compacted mass. Furnish and
use, if necessary, an adequate number of power driven tampers, each
weighing at least 20 pounds for this purpose. Take care that the material
close to the bank, as well as in all other portions of the trench, is
thoroughly compacted. When the trench width and the depth to which
backfill has been placed are sufficient to make it feasible, and it can be
done effectively and without damage to the pipe, backfill may, on
approval of the Engineer, be compacted by the use of suitable rollers,
tractors, or similarly powered equipment instead of by tamping. For
July 2021 Project#19.00305 312300-Page 10

compaction by tamping (or rolling), the rate at which backfilling material is
deposited in the trench shall not exceed that permitted by the facilities for
its spreading, leveling and compacting as furnished by the Contractor.
6. Wet the material by sprinkling, if necessary, to ensure proper compaction
by tamping (or rolling). Perform no compaction by tamping (or rolling)
when the material is too wet either from rain or applied water to be
compacted properly.
7. Trench Compaction: Compact backfill in pipe trenches to the maximum
density as shown on the drawings, or as listed in the subsection entitled
COMPACTION, with a moisture content within the range of values of
maximum density as indicated by the moisture-density relationship curve.
3.5 SITE GRADE
A. Placement and Compaction:
1. Place backfill and fill material in layers not more than 8" in loose depth.
Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide
the optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to the required
percentage of maximum density for each area classification. Do not
place backfill or material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
2. In areas not accessible to rollers or compactors, compact the fill with
mechanical hand tampers. If the mixture is excessively moistened by
rain, aerate the material by means of blade graders, harrows, or other
approved equipment, until the moisture content of the mixture is
satisfactory. Finish the surface of the layer by blading or rolling with a
smooth roller, or a combination thereof, and leave the surface smooth
and free from waves and inequalities.
3. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to the
required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill
against structures. Carry the material uniformly around all parts of the
structure to approximately the same elevation in each lift.
4. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified
under the subsection entitled COMPACTION for the particular area
classification, break up the ground surface, pulverize, moisture-condition
to the optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and
percentage of maximum density.
B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade to drain away from structures to prevent
ponding of water. Finish surface free from irregular surface changes.
C. Planting Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than one inch
(1") above or below the required subgrade elevations, compacted as specified,
and free from irregular surface changes.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 312300-Page 11

D. Walks: Shape the surface of areas under walks to line, grade, and
cross-section, with the finish surface not more than 0" above or 1" below the
required subgrade elevation, compacted as specified, and graded to prevent
ponding of water after rains.
E. Pavements:
1 . Shape the surface of the areas under pavement to line, grade and cross
section, with finish surface not more than 1/2" above or below the
required subgrade elevation, compacted as specified, and graded to
prevent ponding of water after rains. Include such operations as plowing,
discing, and any moisture or aerating required to provide the optimum
moisture content for compaction.
2. Fill low areas resulting from removal of unsatisfactory soil materials,
obstructions, and other deleterious materials, using satisfactory soil
material.
3. Shape to line, grade, and cross section as shown on the drawings.
F. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and
erosion, and keep free of trash and debris. Repair and re-establish grades in
settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances.
G. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are
disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather prior to
acceptance of work, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density
prior to further construction.
H. Unauthorized Excavation:
1 . Unauthorized excavation consists of the removal of materials beyond
indicated elevations without the specific direction of the Engineer. Under
footings, foundations, bases, etc., fill unauthorized excavation by
extending the indicated bottom elevation of the concrete to the bottom of
the excavation, without altering the required top elevation. Lean concrete
fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position only when
acceptable to the Engineer.
2. For pipe trenches and elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized
excavations as specified for authorized excavations of the same
classification, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
3.6 BACKFILL AROUND STRUCTURES
A. General: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, use suitable
material for backfill which was removed in the course of making the backfill and
do not place backfill which was removed in the course of making the
construction excavations. Do not use frozen material for the backfill and do not
July 2021 Project#19.00305 312300-Page 12

place backfill upon frozen material. Remove previously frozen material before
new backfill is placed.
B. Material: Approved selected materials available from the excavations may be
used for backfilling around structures. Obtain material needed in addition to
that of construction excavations from off-site borrow pits selected by the
Contractor. Furnish all borrow material needed on the work. Place and
compact all material, whether from the excavation or borrow, to make a dense,
stable fill. Use fill material which contains no vegetation, masses of roots,
individual roots over 18" long or more than 1/2" in diameter, stones over 4" in
diameter, or porous matter. Organic matter must not exceed negligible
quantities.
C. Placing Backfill: Do not place backfill against or on structures until they have
attained sufficient strength to support the loads (including construction loads) to
which they will be subjected, without distortion, cracking, or other damage.
Make special leakage tests, if required, as soon as practicable after the
structures are structurally adequate and other necessary work has been done.
Use the best of the excavated materials in backfilling within 2 feet of the
structure. Avoid unequal soil pressures by depositing the material evenly
around the structure.
3.7 COMPACTION
A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing at least the
minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification.
B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: After compaction, all fill will be
tested in accordance with Method "C" of ASTM D-698, unless specified
otherwise. Except as noted otherwise for the zone around pipe, provide not less
than the following percentages of maximum density of soil material compacted
at optimum moisture content, for the actual density of each layer of soil
material-in-place:
UNPAVED AREAS Compact Full Depth to 92%
DRIVES AND PARKING Top 24" - 100%
TRENCH BACKFILL (PAVED AREAS) Compact full depth to 100%
TRENCH BACKFILL (UNPAVED AREAS) Compact full depth to 95%
ALL OTHER BACKFILL Compact full depth to 95%
C. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture
conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade,
or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or
subsequent to compaction operations. Remove and replace, or scarify and air
dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. Soil
material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may
July 2021 Project#19.00305 312300-Page 13

be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing
or pulverizing, until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value, as
determined by moisture-density relation tests.
D. Disposal of Surface Material: Upon approval of the Engineer, haul all surplus
materials not needed or acceptable for backfill off-site.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Soil Testing and Inspection Service: Compaction tests of all fill areas will be
made by an independent testing laboratory. Such tests will be provided and
paid for by the Owner, except that tests that reveal non-conformance with the
specifications and all succeeding tests for the same area shall be at the
expense of the Contractor until conformance with the specifications is
established. The Owner will be responsible for paying for only the successful
tests.
END OF SECTION 312300
July 2021 Project#19.00305 312300-Page 14

SECTION 320117 BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT REPAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers the repairs of pavement for all asphalt surfaces.
1.2. PERFORMANCE
A. Construction of the subgrade, base course, and paving shall be undertaken
immediately after completion of all underground piping and structures, all curbs
and gutters, all yard piping, all conduits and all other facilities passing beneath
paved areas, and all structural slabs and foundations required within or
adjacent to the paved areas.
B. Weather Limitations: Bituminous mixtures shall not be produced or placed
during rainy weather, when the subgrade or base course is frozen or shows any
evidence of excess moisture, when moisture on the surface to be paved would
prevent proper bond, nor when the air temperature is less than 40 degrees F°
in the shade away from artificial heat.
1.3. REFERENCES
A. All work and materials required under this section of the specifications shall
conform to the applicable sections of the latest editions of the North Carolina
Department of Transportation Division of Highways Standard Specifications for
Roads and Structures and the North Carolina Department of Transportation
Pavement Construction Section Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt / Quality
Management System.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Preparation of Subqrade: The work covered under this section of this
specification shall be performed in strict accordance with Section 500 of the
latest edition of the North Carolina Department of Transportation Division of
Highways Standard Specifications for Roads and Structures.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 320117-Page 1

B. Application of Aggregate Base Course: The work covered under this section of
this specification shall be performed in strict accordance with Section 520 of the
latest edition of the North Carolina Department of Transportation Division of
Highways Standard Specifications for Roads and Structures.
C. Bituminous Plant Mix - General: The work covered under this section of this
specification shall be performed in strict accordance with Section 610 and
Section 620 of the latest edition of the North Carolina Department of
Transportation Division of Highways Standard Specifications for Roads and
Structures and Sections 2 through 6 and Section 9 of the Superpave Hot Mix
Asphalt / Quality Management System of the North Carolina Department of
Transportation Pavement Construction Section, with the exception that recycled
products are not permitted. For pavement repairs, see Section 654 of the
Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt / Quality Management System of the North
Carolina Department of Transportation Pavement Construction Section.
D. Tack Coat: The work covered under this section of this specification shall be
performed in strict accordance with Section 605 of the latest edition of the North
Carolina Department of Transportation Division of Highways Standard
Specifications for Roads and Structures and Section 9.3 of the Superpave Hot
Mix Asphalt / Quality Management System of the North Carolina Department of
Transportation Pavement Construction Section.
E. Bituminous Base Course (Type B 25.0C): The work covered under this section
of the specification shall be performed in strict accordance with Section 4 of the
Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt / Quality Management System of the North
Carolina Department of Transportation Pavement Construction Section.
F. Bituminous Binder Course (Type 119.0C): The work covered under this section
of the specification shall be performed in strict accordance with Section 4 of the
Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt / Quality Management System of the North
Carolina Department of Transportation Pavement Construction Section.
G. Bituminous Surface Course (Types S 9.5B): The work covered under this
section of the specification shall be performed in strict accordance with Section
4 of the Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt / Quality Management System of the North
Carolina Department of Transportation Pavement Construction Section.
H. Traffic Markings: The Contractor shall repair and restripe any traffic markings
that were damaged, removed or covered during construction. All work shall be
done in accordance with North Carolina Department of Transportation
requirements and specifications. The cost of this work shall be included in the
unit bid prices for other related work and no additional payment shall be made.
Existing Utilities: All existing manhole and valve covers shall be raised by the
Contractor as necessary prior to paving so that the tops of the covers are flush
July 2021 Project#19.00305 320117—Page 2

with the final surface. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit bid
prices for other related work and no additional payment shall be made.
3.2 TESTING
A. All of the above work will be subject to thickness and compaction tests as
deemed necessary by the Engineer and conforming to Section 10 of the
Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt / Quality Management System of the North
Carolina Department of Transportation Pavement Construction Section. Such
tests will be provided and paid for by the Owner, except that tests which reveal
non-conformance with the Specifications and all succeeding tests for the same
area, until conformance with the Specifications is established, shall be at the
expense of the Contractor. The Owner will be responsible for paying for only
the successful tests.
END OF SECTION 320117
July 2021 Project#19.00305 320117—Page 3

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

I
SECTION 322905 RESTORATION OF SURFACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Modified General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section covers the furnishing of all labor, equipment and materials
necessary for the proper restoration of existing surfaces disturbed or damaged
as a result of construction operations which are not specifically scheduled or
specified for topsoil and seeding, paving, landscaping or other surfacing.
B. In general, the types of replacement included in this section are seeding along
pipelines, concrete sidewalks, driveways, roadways, ditches, lawns and
landscaped areas, and curb and gutter.
C. Any damage to existing structures shall be repaired using materials and
workmanship equal to, or better than, those of the original construction.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CABC — Crushed aggregate base course.
B. NCDOT — North Carolina Department of Transportation.
C. PSI — Pounds per square inch.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of the pertinent
specification sections referenced herein.
B. An appropriate concrete mix design shall be submitted for all concrete
sidewalks, driveways, roadways, and curb and gutter restored as part of this
project.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 322905 - Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SEEDING DISTURBED AREAS
A. All ground surfaces disturbed by construction activity, which are not classified
as lawns, landscaped areas, or pavement areas, but would be classified as
open fields, shall be raked smooth and seeded in accordance with the
appropriate paragraph(s) within Section 329200 entitled Turf and Grasses.
Large rocks, clumps of earth and excessive spoil material shall be removed
from the area prior to seeding.
B. Shoulders of all roads shall be restored as specified for lawns and landscaped
areas.
C. Wooded areas not classified as lawns shall be restored to as near their original
condition as possible.
3.2 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
A. Concrete walks removed in connection with, or damaged as a result of,
construction operations under the Contract shall be replaced with new
construction. Such walks shall be constructed of 4,000 PSI concrete on a
thoroughly compacted subgrade, shall have a vertical thickness, unless
otherwise noted, of not less than 4 inches or the thickness of the replaced walk
where greater than 4 inches.
B. Walks shall be float finished, edged with an edging tool, and grooved at
intermediate intervals not in excess of the width of the walk, uniform throughout
the length of the walk in any one direction.
3.3 DRIVEWAYS
A. Unless otherwise noted, unpaved driveways shall be surfaced with not less
than 4 inches of CABC, topped with 4 inches of stone, gravel, or other materials
equal to that found in the original driveway. Driveways shall be left in a
condition better than their original condition.
B. Concrete drives shall be replaced with 4,000 PSI concrete and shall have equal
thickness and reinforcing steel to that of the original drive. Prior to placing the
concrete a 6-inch aggregate base course shall be placed in the drive area.
C. Unless otherwise noted, bituminous or asphaltic concrete drives shall be
restored to original base and asphalt thicknesses or a minimum of 6 inches of
July 2021 Project#19.00305 322905 -Page 2

I
aggregate base course and a 2-inch surface course, whichever is greater. Base
material shall be compacted in 3-inch lifts and Type SF 9.5A or S 9.5B asphalt
compacted in 2-inch lifts to match existing pavement section.
3.4 ROADWAY REPLACEMENT
A. Bituminous or Asphaltic pavements shall include all areas paved with blacktop,
built up pavements or oil and stone, tar and stone and similar pavements
constructed with a bituminous or asphalt and stone materials.
B. Immediately upon completion of installation of underground piping and
structures, the trench shall be backfilled and the roadway shall be repaired.
Provide materials as specified in the Contract Drawings. If, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the area adjacent to the excavation has not been damaged to the
extent that the base course need to be replaced, restoration may consist of a
surface course of sufficient thickness to meet the existing pavement.
C. Unless otherwise noted, bituminous or asphaltic concrete roadways shall be
restored to original base and asphalt thicknesses or a minimum of 6 inches of
aggregate base course and a 2-inch surface course, whichever is greater. Base
material shall be compacted in 3-inch lifts and Type SF 9.5A or S 9.5B asphalt
compacted in 2-inch lifts to match existing pavement section.
D. Portland cement concrete roadways shall be replaced with 4,000 PSI concrete
and shall have equal thickness and reinforcing steel as the original roadway.
An aggregate base course with a thickness of 6 inches shall be placed prior to
the placing of concrete.
E. Differential settlement of restored pavements shall be corrected immediately.
F. The Contractor shall repair and restripe any traffic markings that were
damaged, removed or covered during construction. All work shall be done in
accordance with NCDOT requirements and specifications.
G. All existing manhole and valve covers shall be raised, as required, by the
Contractor prior to paving. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit bid
prices for other related work and no additional payment shall be made.
3.5 DITCHES
A. Ditches shall be regraded to the original grade and line. The surface of all
ditches shall be returned to the same condition as found before commencing
work.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 322905 -Page 3

3.6 LAWNS AND LANDSCAPED AREAS
A. Lawns and landscaped areas shall be regraded and replaced as follows:
1 . Grading shall be to the grade existing before construction of the work
under this Contract.
2. Lawn replacement shall be in accordance with the appropriate
paragraph(s) within Section 329200 entitled Turf and Grasses. Topsoiled
areas shall be replaced with topsoil of equal quality and quantity.
B. Landscaped areas shall be replaced with shrubs, hedges, ornamental trees,
flowers, or other items to original condition.
3.7 CURB AND GUTTER
A. Curb and gutter removed with or damaged as a result of construction
operations, injured or disturbed by the Contractor, his agents, or employees,
shall be replaced with new construction to a condition similar and equal to that
existing before damage was incurred. 4,000 PSI concrete shall be used in curb
and gutter replacement.
B. All work associated with curb and gutter replacement shall be in accordance
with Section 846-3 of the NCDOT Standard Specifications for Roads and
Structures (latest edition). Horizontal and vertical alignment of the curb and
gutter shall match that of the existing to the greatest extent practical, unless
directed otherwise by the Engineer.
3.8 DAMAGE TO STRUCTURES
A. Any damage to existing structures shall be repaired of materials and
workmanship equal to those of original construction. Extensively damaged
structures, where the structural stability has been affected or which cannot be
repaired in a suitable fashion shall be replaced entirely. Replacement shall not
commence until approval of the plan of replacement has been given by the
Engineer. Replacement costs shall be responsibility of the Contractor.
END OF SECTION 322905
July 2021 Project#19.00305 322905 -Page 4

I
I
I
SECTION 330505 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
IA. Scope of Work: This section specifies the leakage testing requirements for plant
piping.
B. Test Pressures: Test pressures for the piping shall be as specified in the
pertinent sections of the project specifications and/or as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
C. Test Method: Test Method for the piping shall be as specified in the pertinent
sections in the project specifications and/or as shown on the Contract Drawings
D. Testing Records:
1. Provide a record of each piping installation during the testing. These
records shall include:
a. Date of test.
b. Identification of pipeline tested or retested.
c. Identification of pipeline material.
d. Identification of pipe specification.
e. Test fluid.
f. Test pressure.
g. Remarks: Leaks identified (type and location), types of repairs, or
corrections made.
h. Certification by Contractor that the leakage rate measured
conformed to the Project Specifications.
i. Signature of Owner's representative witnessing pipe test.
2. Submit five (5) copies of the test records to the Engineer's representative
upon completion of the testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Testing fluid shall be water for all hydrostatic tests, unless pneumatic test is
included.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 330505-Page 1

2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide pressure gauges, pipes, bulkheads, pumps, and meters to perform the
hydrostatic and pneumatic testing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING PREPARATION
A. Pipes shall be in place and anchored before commencing pressure testing.
B. Conduct hydrostatic and pneumatic tests on exposed and aboveground piping
after the piping has been installed and attached to the pipe supports, hangers,
anchors, expansion joints, valves, and meters.
C. Before conducting hydrostatic tests, flush pipes with water to remove dirt and
debris. For pneumatic tests, blow air through the pipes.
D. Test new pipelines which are to be connected to existing pipelines by isolating
the new line from the existing line by means of pipe caps, special flanges, or blind
flanges. After the new line has been successfully tested, remove caps or flanges
and connect to the existing piping.
E. Conduct hydrostatic tests on buried pipe after the trench has been completely
backfilled. The pipe may be partially backfilled and the joints left exposed for
inspection for an initial leakage test. Perform the final test, however, after
completely backfilling and compacting the trench.
F. Pressure Test:
1. All tests shall be made in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the
Owner or Engineer and also, to the satisfaction of any local or state
inspector having jurisdiction.
a. Provide not less than three (3) days' notice to the Owner, Engineer,
and the authority having jurisdiction when it is proposed to make the
tests.
b. Any piping or equipment that has been left unprotected and subject
to mechanical or other injury in the opinion of the Engineer shall be
retested in part or in whole as directed by the Engineer.
c. The piping systems may be tested in sections as the work
progresses, but no joint or portion of the system shall be left
untested.
2. All elements within the system that may be damaged by the testing
operation shall be removed or otherwise protected during the operation.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 330505-Page 2

3. Repair all damage done to existing or adjacent work or materials due to or
on account of the tests.
3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Hydrostatic Testing of Aboveground or Exposed Piping: Open vents at high
points of the piping system to purge air while the pipe is being filled. Subject the
piping system to the test pressure of 11/2 times working pressure unless otherwise
noted. Maintain the test pressure for a minimum of 2 hours. Examine joints,
fittings, valves, and connections for leaks. The piping system shall show no
leakage or weeping. Correct leaks and retest until no leakage is obtained.
B. Hydrostatic Testing of Buried Piping:
1. Where any section of the piping contains concrete thrust blocks or
encasement, do not make the pressure test until at least 10 days after the
concrete has been poured. When testing mortar-lined piping, fill the pipe
to be tested with water and allow it to soak for at least 48 hours to absorb
water before conducting the pressure test.
2. Test Pressure: 50 percent (50%) above the normal working pressure,
unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings.
3. Apply and maintain the test pressure by means of a hydraulic force pump.
Maintain the test pressure for a minimum duration of 2 hours. After the test
pressure is reached, use a meter to measure the additional water added
to maintain the pressure during the 2 hours. This amount of water is the
loss due to leakage in the piping system. The allowable leakage rate is
defined by the formula.
SD(P)1/2T
L _ 133,200
in which:
L = Allowable Leakage During the Test Period (gallons)
S = Length of Pipe Tested (feet)
D = Diameter of the Pipe (inches)
P = Specified Test Pressure (psig)
T = Specified Time (hours)
4. Visible Leakage: All leaks evident at the surface shall be repaired and
leakage eliminated regardless of the measured total leakage.
5. Leakage Measurement: The amount of water required to maintain the test
pressure is the leakage.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 330505- Page 3

6. Repair and retest any pipes showing leakage rates greater than that
allowed.
7. Leakage Repair: Repairs to leaks shall be completed in strict accordance
with the pipe manufacturer's written recommendations.
C. Pneumatic Testing:
1. Test Pressure: Minimum 1'/2 times working pressure.
2. Perform pneumatic testing using nitrogen. Perform tests only after the
piping has been completely installed including supports, hangers, and
anchors. Protect test personnel and Owner's operating personnel. Secure
piping to be tested to prevent the pipe from moving and to prevent damage
to adjacent piping and equipment. Remove or isolate from the pipe any
appurtenant instruments or devices that could be damaged by the test,
prior to applying the test.
3. Apply an initial pneumatic leakage test of 25-psig to the piping system prior
to final leak testing. Examine for leakage, detected by soap bubbles, at
joints and connections. After correcting visible leaks, gradually increase
the pressure in the system to not more than one-half of the test pressure.
Then increase the pressure in steps of approximately one-tenth of the test
pressure until the required test pressure has been reached. Continuously
maintain the pneumatic test pressure for a minimum time of 2 hours and
for such additional time as may be necessary to conduct a soap bubble
examination for leakage. The piping system shall show no leakage. Correct
any visible leakage and retest.
D. Vacuum Testing:
1. Test Pressure: Minimum 11/2 times working vacuum pressure.
2. Perform vacuum test after performing a pneumatic test (as previously
specified) on all lines scheduled for vacuum testing. Develop a vacuum in
the entire line being tested by use of temporary mechanical means and as
measured by attached gauges. Develop vacuum slowly until test vacuum
pressure has been achieved. Vacuum must hold for 4 hours without
significant loss in vacuum pressure to demonstrate a leakproof system.
END OF SECTION 330505
July 2021 Project#19.00305 330505-Page 4

SECTION 400500 PIPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
IA. This section identifies process-mechanical piping systems to be provided,
specifies unique requirements for each system identified, and references other
sections where detailed requirements of piping components are specified.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials and Equipment: Unless otherwise specified, all materials and
equipment furnished for permanent installation in the Work shall conform to
applicable standards and specifications and shall be new, unused, of first quality
manufactured in the United States, and undamaged when installed or otherwise
incorporated in the Work. All materials shall conform to the appropriate AWWA
standards. No such material or equipment shall be used by the Contractor for
any purpose other than that intended or specified, unless such use is specifically
authorized in writing by the Owner. No material shall be delivered to the work site
workout prior acceptance of shop drawings and data by the Engineer.
B. Equivalent Materials and Equipment:
1. Whenever a material or article is specified or described by using the name
of a proprietary product or the name of a particular manufacturer or vendor,
the specific item mentioned shall be understood as establishing the type,
function, and quality desired. Other manufacturers' products will be
accepted provided sufficient information is submitted to allow the Engineer
to determine that the products proposed are equivalent to those named.
Such items shall be submitted for review in accordance with Section
013300.
2. Requests for review of equivalency will not be accepted from anyone
except the Contractor and such requests will not be considered until after
the contract has been awarded.
C. Governing Standards: Equipment and appurtenances shall be designed in
conformity with ANSI, ASME, ASTM, IEEE, NEMA, OSHA, AGMA, and other
generally accepted applicable standards. They shall be of rugged construction
and of sufficient strength to withstand all stresses which may occur during
fabrication, testing, transportation, installation, and all conditions or operations.
All bearings and moving parts shall be adequately protected against wear by
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500-Page 1

bushings or other acceptable means. Provisions shall be made for adequate
lubrication with readily accessible means.
D. Tolerances: Machinery parts shall conform to the dimensions indicated on the
Contract Drawings within allowable tolerances. Protruding members such as
joints, corners, and gear covers shall be finished in appearance. All exposed
welds shall be ground smooth and the corners of structural shapes shall be
rounded or chamfered.
E. Clearances: Ample clearances shall be provided for inspection and adjustment.
All equipment shall fit the allotted space and shall leave reasonable access room
for servicing and repairs. Greater space and room required by substituted
equipment shall be provided by the Contractor and at his expense.
F. Testing:
1. When the equipment is specified to be factory tested, the results of the
tests shall be submitted to the Engineer and approval of the test results
shall be obtained before shipment of the equipment.
2. When an item of equipment, including controls and instrumentation, has
been completely erected, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, who will
designate a time to make such tests as required, and operate the item to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. All testing shall be done in the presence
of the Engineer or Resident Project Representative. "Completely erected"
shall mean that the installation is erected, all necessary adjustments have
been made, all required utility connections have been made, required
lubricants and hydraulic fluid have been added and the unit has been
cleaned and painted.
G. Pressure Test:
1. After installation, all piping shall be pressure tested. Piping shall be tested
in accordance with Section 330505: Pressure Testing of Piping.
2. All tests shall be made in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and also, to the satisfaction of any local or state inspector having
jurisdiction.
a. Provide not less than three days notice to the Engineer and the
authority having jurisdiction when it is proposed to make the tests.
b. Any piping or equipment that has been left unprotected and subject
to mechanical or other injury in the opinion of the Engineer shall be
retested in part or in whole as directed by the Engineer.
c. The piping systems may be tested in sections as the Work
progresses by no joint or portion of the system shall be left untested.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500-Page 2

3. All elements within the system that may be damaged by the testing
operation shall be removed or otherwise protected during the operation.
4. All defects and leaks observed during the tests shall be corrected and
made tight in an approved manner and the tests repeated until the system
is proven tight.
5. Repair all damage done to existing or adjacent work or materials due to or
on account of the tests.
6. Provide test pumps, gauges, or other instruments and equipment required
for the performance of all tests. Provide all temporary bracing, test plugs,
additional restraint, and thrust blocking which may be required for test
pressures above normal working pressures.
7. All tests shall be maintained for as long a time as required to detect all
defects and leaks but not less than the duration specified for each type of
pipe or piping system in this Division.
H. Failure of Test:
1. Defects: Any defects in the equipment, or deviations from the guarantees
or requirements of the Specifications, shall be promptly corrected by the
Contractor by replacements or otherwise. The decision of the Engineer as
to whether or not the Contractor has fulfilled his obligations under the
Contract shall be final and conclusive. If the Contractor fails to correct any
defects or deviations, or if the replaced equipment when tested shall fail
again to meet the guarantees or specified requirements, the Owner,
notwithstanding his having made partial payment for work and materials
which have entered into the manufacturer for such equipment, may reject
that equipment and order the Contractor to remove it from the premises at
the Contractor's expense.
2. Rejection of Equipment: In case the Owner rejects a particular item of
equipment, then the Contractor hereby agrees to repay to the Owner all
sums of money paid to him to deliver to the Contractor a bill of sale of all
his rights, title, and interest in and to the rejected equipment provided,
however that the equipment shall not be removed from the premises until
the Owner obtains from other sources other equipment to take the place of
that rejected. The bill of sale shall not abrogate the Owner's right to recover
damages for delays, losses or other conditions arising out of the basic
Contract. The Owner hereby agrees to obtain the alternate equipment
within a reasonable time and the Contractor agrees that the Owner may
use the original equipment furnished by him without rental or other charge
until the other equipment is obtained.
Responsibility During Tests: The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the
proper operation of equipment during tests and instruction periods and shall
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500-Page 3

neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment prior
to the time when the Owner formally takes over the operation thereof.
J. Acceptance of Materials:
1. Only new materials and equipment shall be incorporated in the Work. All
materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to
the inspection and acceptance of the Owner. No material shall be delivered
to the Work without prior submittal approval of the Engineer.
2. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer data relating to materials and
equipment he proposes to furnish for the Work. Such data shall be in
sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to identify the particular product and
to form an opinion as to its conformity to the Specifications.
3. Facilities and labor for handling and inspection of all materials and
equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor. If the Engineer requires,
either prior to beginning or during the progress of the Work, the Contractor
shall submit samples of materials for such special test as may be
necessary to demonstrate that they conform to the Specifications. Such
sample shall be furnished, stored, packed, and shipped as directed at the
Contractor's expense. Except as otherwise noted, the Owner will make
arrangements for and pay for tests.
4. The Contractor shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit
consideration and acceptance before materials are necessary for
incorporation in the Work.
K. Safety Requirements:
1. In addition to the components shown and specified, all machinery and
equipment shall be safeguarded in accordance with the safety features
required by the current codes and regulations of ANSI, OSHA, and local
industrial codes.
2. The Contractor shall provide for each exposed V-belt drive or rotating shaft
a protective guard which shall be securely bolted to the floor or apparatus.
The guard shall completely enclose drives and pulleys and be constructed
to comply with all applicable safety requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Engineer in accordance with Section 013300.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500- Page 4

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: All equipment shall be suitably packaged to facilitate handling and
protect against damage during transit and storage. All equipment shall be boxed,
crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipment,
handling, and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the
elements and shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times.
B. Protection: All machined surfaces and shafting shall be cleaned and protected
from corrosion by the proper type and amount of coating necessary to assure
protection during shipment and prior to installation. Painted surfaces shall be
protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. All painted
surfaces which are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted
to the satisfaction of Engineer.
C. Lubrication: Grease and lubricating oil shall be applied to all bearings and similar
items as necessary to prevent damage during shipment and storage.
D. Marking: Each item of equipment shall be tagged or marked as identified in the
delivery schedule or on the Shop Drawings. Complete packing lists and bills of
material shall be included with each shipment.
E. Fabricated sub-assemblies, if any, shall be shipped in convenient sections as
permitted by carrier regulations and shall be properly match-marked for ease of
field erection.
F. Responsibility:
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment, and
supplies sold and delivered to the site under this Contract until final
acceptance of the Work by the Owner. In the event any such material,
equipment, and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged, or destroyed prior to
final inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall replace same without
additional cost to the Owner.
2. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of
equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written
notice to do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all
deficiencies noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the
cost associated with these corrections from the Contractor's Contract.
These costs may be comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment
usage, administrative, clerical, engineering, and any other costs
associated with making the necessary corrections.
G. Delivery: The Contractor shall arrange deliveries of products in accordance with
construction schedules and coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions
at the site.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500-Page 5

1. The Contractor shall deliver products in undamaged condition, in
manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels
intact and legible.
2. Immediately on delivery, the Contractor shall inspect shipments to assure
compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and accepted
submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged.
3. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor deliver equipment to the site
more than one month prior to installation without written authorization from
the Engineer. Operation and maintenance data shall be submitted to the
Engineer for review prior to shipment of equipment as described in Section
017823 — Operating and Maintenance Data.
H. Storage and Protection of Products:
1. The Contractor shall furnish a covered, weather-protected storage
structure providing clean, dry noncorrosive environment for all mechanical
equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation
equipment, and special equipment to be incorporated into this project.
Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "Instructions for
Storage" of each equipment supplier and manufacturer furnished and
installed including connection of space heaters, and placing stored
lubricants in equipment. Corroded, damaged, or deteriorated equipment
and parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the project. Equipment
and materials not properly stored will not be included in a payment
estimate.
a. The Contractor shall store products subject to damage by the
elements in weathertight enclosures.
b. The Contractor shall maintain temperature and humidity within the
ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.
c. The Contractor shall store fabricated products above the ground, on
blocking or skids, to prevent soiling or staining. The Contractor shall
cover products which are subject to deterioration with impervious
sheet coverings and provide adequate ventilation to avoid
condensation.
d. The Contractor shall store loose granular materials in a well-drained
area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter.
2. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work shall be
handled and stored by the Contractor before, during, and after shipment in
a manner to prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting,
and any injury, theft, or damage of any kind whatsoever to the material or
equipment.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500-Page 6

3. Cement, sand, and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground,
and shall be kept completely dry at all times. All structural and
miscellaneous steel and reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or
otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt or grease, and in a position to
prevent accumulations of standing water, staining, chipping, or cracking.
Brick, block, and similar masonry products shall be handled and stored in
a manner to reduce breakage, chipping, cracking, and spalling to a
minimum.
4. All materials which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become damaged
and are unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed
from the site of the Work and the Contractor shall receive no compensation
for the damaged material or its removal.
5. The Contractor shall arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access
for inspection. The Contractor shall make periodic inspections of stored
products to assure products are maintained under specified conditions,
and free from damage or deterioration.
6. Protection After Installation: The Contractor shall provide substantial
coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from
traffic and subsequent construction operations. The Contractor shall
remove covering when no longer needed.
I. Extended Storage Requirements For Equipment: Because of the long period
allowed for construction, special attention shall be given to extended storage and
handling of equipment onsite. As a minimum, the procedure specified herein
shall be followed:
1. If equipment will be stored onsite for more than one month prior to
incorporation into the Work, the Contractor shall submit a written request
to the Engineer outlining any special provision to be made to protect and
maintain the equipment while it is being stored. All such provisions shall be
acceptable to the Owner. No equipment shall be stored onsite for more
than one month without prior written authorization from the Engineer.
2. All equipment having moving parts including gears, electric motors, and/or
instruments shall be stored in a temperature and humidity controlled
building accepted by the Engineer, until such time as the equipment is to
be installed.
3. All equipment shall be stored fully lubricated with oil and grease unless
otherwise instructed by the manufacturer.
4. Manufacturer's storage instructions shall be carefully studied by the
Contractor and reviewed by him with the Engineer. These instructions shall
be carefully followed and a written record of this review kept by the
Contractor.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500-Page 7

5. Moving parts shall be rotated a minimum of once weekly to ensure proper
lubrication and to avoid metal-to-metal "welding". Upon installation of the
equipment the Contractor shall start the equipment and operate, loaded
when possible, once weekly for an adequate period of time to ensure that
the equipment does not deteriorate from lack of use.
6. Lubricants shall be changed upon completion of installation and as
frequently as required thereafter during the period between installation and
final acceptance. Mechanical equipment to be used in the Work, if stored
for longer than ninety (90) days, shall have the bearings cleaned, flushed,
and lubricated prior to testing and startup, at no extra cost to the Owner.
7. Prior to acceptance of the equipment, the Contractor shall have the
manufacturer inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not
been detrimentally affected by the long storage period. Such certifications
by the manufacturer shall be deemed to mean that the equipment is judged
by the manufacturer to be in a condition equivalent to that of equipment
that has been shipped, installed, tested, and accepted in a minimum time
period. As such, the manufacturer will guarantee the equipment equally in
both instances. If such a certification is not given, the equipment shall be
judged to be defective, and it shall be removed and replaced at the
Contractor's expense.
8. A maintenance log shall be maintained by the Contractor outlining the
schedule of maintenance required for each piece of equipment as well as
the date on which the maintenance was actually performed and the initials
of the individual performing the Work. Submit a copy of the maintenance
log monthly with the progress pay application.
1.5 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES
A. The manufacturer's written warranty shall be submitted for all major pieces of
equipment. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with the
Contractor's correction period for one (1) year after the time of completion and
acceptance.
1.6 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare parts in an area to be designated
by the Engineer. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer an
inventory listing of all spare parts, the equipment they are associated with, and
the name and address of the supplier.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500-Page 8

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. All grease, oil, and fuel required for testing of equipment shall be furnished by
the Contractor with the respective equipment. The Owner shall be furnished with
a year's supply of required lubricants including grease and oil of the type
recommended by the manufacturer with each item of equipment supplied.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and
intermediate drives of each mechanical equipment after initial break-in of the
equipment, which in no event shall be any longer than three weeks of operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE
A. Workmanship and Materials:
1. Contractor shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or inadequate
design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or
materials, and leakage, breakage or other failure. Materials shall be
suitable for service conditions.
2. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance
with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual
parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gages so that repair
parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of
duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in
service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests.
3. Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated
steel used in equipment shall conform to AISC standards. All structural
members shall be designed for shock or vibratory loads. Unless otherwise
specified, all steel which will be submerged, all or in part, during normal
operation of the equipment shall be at least '/4-inch thick.
B. Lubrication:
1 . Equipment shall be adequately lubricated by systems which require
attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous operation.
Lubrication systems shall not require attention during startup or shutdown
and shall not waste lubricants.
2. Lubricants of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall
be furnished by the Contractor in sufficient quantity to fill all lubricant
reservoirs and to replace all consumption during testing, startup, and
operation prior to acceptance of equipment by Owner. Unless otherwise
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500- Page 9

specified or permitted, the use of synthetic lubricants will not be
acceptable.
3. Lubrication facilities shall be convenient and accessible. Oil drains and fill
openings shall be easily accessible from the normal operating area or
platform. Drains shall allow for convenient collection of waste oil in
containers from the normal operating area or platform without removing the
unit from its normal installed position.
C. Equipment Foundation Supports:
1. All foundations, platforms and hangers required for the proper installation
of equipment shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.
2. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all equipment shall be installed on
reinforced concrete bases at least 6-inch high and shall conform to Section
03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. Cast iron or welded steel baseplates shall
be provided for pumps, compressors, and other equipment. Each unit and
its drive assembly shall be supported on a single baseplate of neat design.
Baseplates shall have pads for anchoring all components and adequate
grout holes. Baseplates for pumps shall have a means for collecting
leakage and a threaded drain connection. Baseplates shall be anchored to
the concrete base with suitable anchor bolts. All open equipment bases
shall be filled with nonshrinking grout sloped to drain to the perimeter of
the base.
3. The Contractor shall furnish, install and protect all necessary guides,
bearing plates, anchor and attachment bolts, and all other appurtenances
required for the installation of equipment. These shall be of ample size and
strength for the purpose intended.
D. Shop Painting:
1. All steel and iron surfaces shall be protected by suitable paint or coatings
applied in the shop. Surfaces which will be inaccessible after assembly
shall be protected for the life of the equipment. Exposed surfaces shall be
finished smooth, thoroughly cleaned, and filled as necessary to provide a
smooth uniform base for painting. Electric motors, speed reducers,
starters, and other self-contained or enclosed components shall be shop
primed or finished with a high-grade oil-resistant enamel suitable for
coating in the field with an alkyd enamel. Coatings shall be suitable for the
environment where the equipment is installed.
2. Surfaces to be painted after installation shall be prepared for painting as
recommended by the paint manufacturer for the intended service, and then
shop painted with one or more coats of the specified primer. Unless
otherwise specified, the shop primer for steel and iron surfaces shall in
accordance with Section 099000 Painting.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500-Page 10

3. Unless otherwise noted or recommended by the manufacturer, machined,
polished, and nonferrous surfaces which are not to be painted shall be
coated with rust-preventive compound, Houghton "Rust Veto 344", Rust-
Oleum "R-9", or equivalent.
E. Nameplates: Contractor shall provide equipment identification nameplates for
each item of equipment.
1. All items of equipment listed in the instrument schedule, control panels,
and all items of digital hardware shall be identified with nameplates. Each
nameplate shall be located so that it is readable from the normal
observation position and is clearly associated with the device or devices it
identifies. Nameplates shall be positioned so that removal of the device for
maintenance and repair shall not disturb the nameplate. Nameplates shall
include the equipment identification number and description. Abbreviations
p
of the description shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.
2. Control panel nameplates shall be made of 1/16 inch thick machine
engraved laminated phenolic plastic having white numbers and letters not
less than 3/16 inch high on a black background.
3. Field mounted nameplates shall be engraved 316 stainless steel, 22 gauge
minimum thickness.
4. Nameplates shall be attached to metal equipment by stainless steel screws
and to other surfaces by an epoxy based adhesive that is resistant to oil
and moisture. In cases where the label cannot be attached by the above
methods, it shall be drilled and attached to the associated device by means
of stainless steel wire.
F. Noise Attenuation and Control:
1. Unless otherwise specified, the maximum permissible noise level for a
complete installed piece of equipment located within or outside a structure
shall not exceed 85-dB at 3-feet. A complete piece of equipment includes
the driver and driven equipment, plus any intermediate couplings, gears,
and auxiliaries. All equipment provided herein that is specified to be factory
and field tested shall be tested as specified herein for noise generation at
the equipment manufacturer's expense.
2. Maximum permissible noise (sound pressure) levels shall be in decibels as
read on the "A" weighting scale of a standard sound level meter (dB); all
measurements shall be made in relation to a reference pressure of 0.0002-
microbar. Measurements of emitted noise levels shall be made on a sound
level meter meeting at least the Type 2 requirements set forth in ANSI/ASA
S1.4, Specification for Sound Level Meters. The sound level meter shall be
set on the "A" scale and to slow response. Unless otherwise specified for
a particular piece of equipment, the point of measurement of sound level
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500-Page 11

shall be made at the specified distance from any major surface along the
entire perimeter and at midheight of the piece of equipment, or at the
specified distance from an outer major surface encompassing the sound
source including inlets or outlets.
B. Fire Hazard Rating:
1 . All piping, fastener, and jacketing materials shall have a fire hazard rating
not to exceed 25 for flame spread, 50 for fuel contributed, and 50 for smoke
developed. Rating shall be determined by ASTM Designation E84,
"Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". Corresponding
ratings determined by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL-723, "Test
Method for Fire Hazard Classification of Building Materials", will also be
acceptable.
2. Flameproofing treatments will not be acceptable.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
C. Special Tools and Accessories: Equipment requiring periodic repair and
adjustment shall be furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and --
accessories required for proper maintenance. Equipment requiring special
devices for lifting or handling shall be furnished complete with those devices.
D. Fasteners: All nuts, bolts, anchors and other fastening devices shall be a
minimum of 304 stainless steel unless otherwise specified. If the nuts, bolts,
anchors, and other fastening devices are subject to corrosive environments they
shall be a minimum of 316 stainless steel unless otherwise specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
A. Installation
1 . Pipe and Fittings
a. Trenches shall be maintained in a dry condition at all times unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
b. Swabs shall be installed during installation for flushing purposes.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500- Page 12

c. Maintain horizontal and separation of water from sewer and
stormwater piping in accordance with the FDEP requirements.
Sewer should always be below water on vertical separations.
d. Install pipe to indicated elevation to within tolerance of %-inches.
Minimum cover shall be 36-inches unless otherwise stipulated or
authorized by the Owner.
e. Install DIP and fittings to comply with requirements of AWWA C600.
Install PVC Piping to comply with Uni-B-3 recommended practices.
Install HDPE piping to comply with Mini-Horizontal Directional Drilling
Manual. All tapping shall be done with a tapping machine designed
for this specific service. All pipe cutting shall be accomplished by
power-operated abrasive wheel or saw cutters.
f. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing
pipe or joints.
g. Install access fittings to permit the disinfection for potable water
system.
h. All fittings and valves shall be restrained with megalug or equal
retainer glands. All stubs shall be restrained with a minimum of 80-
lineal feet of pipe beyond the valve. Where this is not possible, utilize
Owner approved retaining glands.
Pipe shall be laid in a level trench. Hand trim excavation for accurate
placement of pipe to elevations indicated. The width of trenches for
installation of all lines shall be in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer recommendations, OSHA safety requirements, and all
applicable codes. Trench widths shall not be less than necessary for
safe and proper construction. Where required, excavation support
systems shall be provided.
j. Installation and restoration operation under roads, shoulders or other
level areas shall be performed in compliance with any local, County
or State requirements, which ever may apply.
k. Every effort shall be made to cover pipe ends during installation and
a watertight plug or other approved seal must be used when
installation is not in progress.
The inspector, to minimize public inconvenience or danger to life or
property, may limit length of an open trench on existing roads.
m. At the completion of pipe installation, contractor must pig lines to
clean and remove any foreign debris from potable water piping main
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500- Page 13

prior to doing disinfection. For wastewater piping lines must be
cleaned and free of any foreign debris.
2. Connections to Existing Lines
a. Where connections are required to be made between new piping and
existing piping, the connection shall be made in a thorough and
workmanlike manner using proper materials, fittings, and labor
practices to suit the existing materials and conditions.
b. Where a connection is made to an existing fitting, the contractor shall
schedule his work so that the excavation and location of this existing
fitting can be completed prior to starting trench work on the line.
c. The Contractor under the direction of the Owner shall do all taps to
existing lines in the presence of the Owner's Utilities Inspector,
unless otherwise approved.
d. Whenever it is required to interrupt existing water supplies to
residences or businesses, the contractor shall notify all concerned
parties or agencies at least 72 hours in advance of such cut-off.
Contractor must first obtain approval from the Owner.
B. Equipment shall not be installed or operated except by, or with the guidance of,
qualified personnel having the knowledge and experience necessary for proper
results. When so specified, or when employees of Contractor or his
subcontractors are not qualified, such personnel shall be field representatives of
the manufacturer of the equipment or materials being installed.
1. The Contractor shall have on site sufficient proper construction equipment
and machinery to facilitate the work and to handle all emergencies normally
encountered in work of this character. To minimize field erection problems,
mechanical units shall be factory assembled when practical.
2. Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the
foundations and supports at the locations and elevations shown on the
Contract Drawings, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer during
installation.
3. All equipment shall be installed in such a manner as to provide access for
routine maintenance including lubrication.
4. For equipment which require field alignment and connections, the
Contractor shall provide the services of the equipment manufacturer's
qualified mechanic, millwright, machinist, or authorized representative.
5. Equipment of a portable nature which requires no installation shall be
delivered to a location designated by the Owner.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500-Page 14

C. Tolerances: Precision gauges and levels shall be used in setting all equipment.
All piping and equipment shall be perfectly aligned, horizontally and vertically.
Tolerances for piping and equipment installation shall be 1/2-inch to 30-feet
horizontal and vertically. All valves and operators shall be installed in the position
shown on the Contract Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, if not shown.
D. Alignment and Level: The equipment shall be brought to proper level by shims
(1/4-inch maximum). After the machine has been leveled and aligned, the nuts on
the anchor bolts shall be tightened to bind the machine firmly into place against
the wedges or shims.
E. Grouting: The grout shall be tamped into position with a board, steel bar, or other
tool. Tamping should not be so hard as to raise or otherwise displace the plate.
F. Contact of Dissimilar Metals: Where the contact of dissimilar metal may cause
electrolysis and where aluminum will contact concrete, mortar, or plaster, the
contact surface of the metals shall be separated using not less than one coat of
zinc chromate primer and one heavy coat of aluminum pigmented asphalt paint
on each surface.
G. Cutting and Patching: All cutting and patching necessary for the Work shall be
performed by the Contractor.
H. Operation: All equipment installed under this Contract, including that furnished
by Owner or others under separate contract, shall be placed into successful
operation according to the written instructions of the manufacturer or the
instructions of the manufacturer's field representative. All required adjustments,
tests, operation checks, and other startup activity shall be provided.
3.2 TESTING
A. When the equipment is specified to be factory tested, the results of the tests shall
be submitted to the Engineer and approval of the test results shall be obtained
before shipment of the equipment.
B. When an item of equipment, including controls and instrumentation, has been
completely erected, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, who will designate
a time to make such tests as required, and operate the item to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Engineer or
Resident Project Representative. "Completely erected" shall mean that the
installation is erected, all necessary adjustments have been made, all required
utility connections have been made, required lubricants and hydraulic fluid have
been added and the unit has been cleaned and painted.
C. Pressure Test: Pressure testing for piping shall be performed in accordance with
Section 330505— Pressure Testing of Piping.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500- Page 15

D. Failure of Test:
1. Defects: Any defects in the equipment, or deviations from the guarantees
or requirements of the Specifications, shall be promptly corrected by the
Contractor by replacements or otherwise. The decision of the Engineer as
to whether or not the Contractor has fulfilled his obligations under the
Contract shall be final and conclusive. If the Contractor fails to correct any
defects or deviations, or if the replaced equipment when tested shall fail
again to meet the guarantees or specified requirements, the Owner,
notwithstanding his having made partial payment for work and materials
which have entered into the manufacturer for such equipment, may reject
that equipment and order the Contractor to remove it from the premises at
the Contractor's expense.
2. Rejection of Equipment: In case the Owner rejects a particular item of
equipment, then the Contractor hereby agrees to repay to the Owner all
sums of money paid to him to deliver to the Contractor a bill of sale of all
his rights, title, and interest in and to the rejected equipment provided,
however that the equipment shall not be removed from the premises until
the Owner obtains from other sources other equipment to take the place of
that rejected. The bill of sale shall not abrogate the Owner's right to recover
damages for delays, losses or other conditions arising out of the basic
Contract. The Owner hereby agrees to obtain the alternate equipment
within a reasonable time and the Contractor agrees that the Owner may
use the original equipment furnished by him without rental or other charge
until the other equipment is obtained.
E. Responsibility During Tests: The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the
proper operation of equipment during tests and instruction periods and shall
neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment prior
to the time when the Owner formally takes over the operation thereof.
3.3 OBSERVATION OF PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Where the specifications require observation of performance tests by the
Engineer or Resident Project Representative, such tests shall comply with the
quality assurance paragraph in this Section.
3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Services Furnished Under This Contract:
1. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the
manufacturer of each item of equipment shall visit the site of the Work and
inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation.
In each case, the manufacturer's representative shall be present when the
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500-Page 16

equipment is placed in operation. The manufacturer's representative shall
revisit the jobsite as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and
the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of
Engineer.
2. Each manufacturer's representative shall furnish to Owner and Engineer a
p g
letter of certification stating that the equipment has been properly installed
and lubricated; is in accurate alignment; is free from any undue stress
imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; and has been operated
under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily.
3. All costs for field services shall be included in the contract amount.
END OF SECTION 400500
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400500- Page 17

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 400507 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work: Furnish and install all pipe supports as indicated and as specified
herein.
B. Number and Location: The Contract Drawings depict only minimum pipe support
locations. Adequate pipe supports shall be supplied for all piping systems to
provide a rigid overall installation and additional support for pipe ends when
equipment is disconnected.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Engineer in accordance with Section 013300 — Submittal
Procedures.
B. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for all pipe support devices and
materials demonstrating compliance with this section and the support details
shown on the Contract Drawings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. All equipment furnished under this Specification shall be new and unused
and shall be a standard product which has a successful record of reliable
service in similar installations for a minimum of 5 years.
B. Standards: Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the products
herein specified shall be in accordance with, but not limited to, published
standards of the following as applicable:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
a. ANSI/ASME B16.1 and B16.5 — Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
Package
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400507- Page 1

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM A123 — Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
b. ASTM A320 — Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless
Steel Bolting for Low-Temperature Service
c. ASTM D1785 — Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
4. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
5. American Water Works Association (AWWA)
a. AWWA/ANSI C150/A21.50 —Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe
b. AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51 — Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast
6. Where reference is made to standards of one (1) of the above, or other
originations, the latest edition or version shall apply.
C. Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty in accordance with the Division 01 -
General Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING SUPPORTS FOR METAL PIPE
A. Furnish and install supports necessary to hold the piping and appurtenances in
a firm, substantial manner at the lines and grades indicated on the Contract
Drawings or specified. Piping supports and hangers shall conform to Federal
Specification WW-H-171 or shall be as specifically shown or indicated on the
Contract Drawings. Piping within structures shall be adequately supported from
floors, walls, ceilings or beams. Supports from the floor shall be approved flange
supports, saddle stands or suitable concrete piers as indicated or approved. Pipe
saddles shall be shaped to fit the pipe with which they will be used and shall be
capable of screw adjustment.
B. Concrete piers shall conform accurately to the bottom IA to of the pipe. Piping
along walls shall be supported by approved wall brackets with attached pipe rolls
or saddles or by wall brackets with adjustable hanger rods. For piping supported
from the ceiling, approved rod hangers proportioned for the size of pipe to be
supported and of a type capable of screw adjustment after erection of the
pipeline, with suitable adjustable concrete inserts or beam clamps, shall be used.
The use of perforated band iron strap (plumber's strap), wire, or chain as pipe
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400507- Page 2

hangers will not be acceptable. If required, piping supports shall be placed so as
to provide a uniform slope in the pipe without sagging. Supports shall be located
wherever necessary in the opinion of the Engineer; however, in no case shall
they exceed the dimensions shown herein. Adequate supports shall especially
be used adjacent to valves and fittings in pipelines. Fabricated steel or cast iron
pipe supports, saddles, rolls, brackets and the like shall be as manufactured by
Grinnell or an approved equal by the Engineer.
C. All fabricated steel or cast iron pipe supports, saddles, rolls, brackets, devises,
and the like shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication and/or machining in
accordance with ASTM A123. All nuts, bolts, clips and other hardware, and all
hanger rods used for pipe supports, shall be AISI Type 316 stainless steel. All
nuts, bolts and threaded rods shall be in accordance with ASTM A320, Class 2.
All such devices shall be painted in accordance with Section 099000 Painting,
after installation.
2.2 PIPE SUPPORTS FOR PLASTIC PIPE
A. Single plastic pipes shall be supported by pipe supports as previously specified
herein.
B. Multiple, suspended, horizontal plastic pipe runs, where possible, and rubber
hose shall be supported by ladder type cable trays such as the Electray Ladder
by Husky-Burntly, the Globetray by the Metal Products Division of United States
Gypsum, or equal. Ladder shall be of mild steel construction. Rung spacing shall
be approximately 18 inches for plastic pipe and 12 inches for rubber hose. Tray
width shall be approximately 6- inch for single runs of rubber hose and 12 inches
for double runs of rubber hose. Ladder type cable trays shall be furnished
complete with all hanger rods, rod couplings, concrete inserts, hanger clips, etc.
required for a complete support system. Individual plastic pipes shall be secured
to the rungs of the cable tray by strap clamps or fasteners equal to Globe Model
M-CAC, Husky-Burndy Model SCR or approved equal. Spacing between clamps
shall not exceed 9 feet. The cable trays shall provide continuous support along
the length of the pipe.
C. Individual clamps, hangers, and supports in contact with plastic pipe shall provide
firm support but not so firm as to prevent longitudinal movement due to thermal
expansion and contraction.
2.3 PIPE SUPPORTS FOR SMALL DIAMETER PVC PIPE AND STEEL PIPE
A. Small diameter PVC piping 4-inches in diameter and smaller, shall be supported
with AISI Type 316 stainless steel pipe supports. Hardware used for pipe
supports shall be AISI Type 316 stainless steel.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400507-Page 3

B. In some cases, to adequately support small diameter PVC or steel piping, a metal
frame support structure may be required for support of the piping system. Where
required, metal frame support structures shall be constructed using channels,
fittings, brackets, hardware and other accessories as manufactured by B-Line
Systems, Inc. or an approved equal by the Engineer. The materials for the frame
structure shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted on the
Contract Drawings. Hardware used to construct the frame support structure shall
be Type 316 stainless steel.
C. Pipe supports for small diameter PVC and steel piping shall be located wherever
necessary in the opinion of the Engineer to adequately support the pipe;
however, they shall have a maximum spacing as specified hereinafter for straight
pipe runs. Adequate supports shall especially be used adjacent to valves and
fittings in pipelines.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install hangers or supports at all changes in direction at the spacing
requirements stated in this specification and at the end of piping runs to
minimize the stresses imposed on piping, valves, associated equipment
and appurtenances.
2. Piping support systems and accessories shall be installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Install all hangers, supports, rods, inserts, clamps, bolts and other
supporting devices of sizes and spacings to prevent loads from exceeding
the manufacturer's maximum recommended loading with a safety factor of
5.0.
4. Secure hangers to beams or approved concrete insert where possible.
5. When piping is installed on structural steel supports, provide blocking of
pipe rolls to prevent lateral pipe movement.
6. Do not support piping from other pipes or from stairs and walkways.
7. Wherepossible, set all inserts or anchor bolts before concrete is placed.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400507- Page 4

B. Expansion and Contraction:
1. Rigidly support all piping with adequate provisions for expansion and
contraction.
2. Firmly anchor horizontal runs over 50-feet in length at the midpoint of the
runs to force expansion equally toward the ends.
C. Spacing:
1. Install hangers and supports at sufficiently close intervals to maintain
alignment and prevent sagging.
2. The following table is based on spacing requirements for hard drawn
copper tube, Class 53 DIP, Schedule 80 PVC, or Standard Weight
(Schedule 40) steel pipe carrying a fluid with a Specific Gravity of 1.0 at a
temperature not exceeding 120°F. Support spacing for other pipe materials
or for piping carrying fluids with a Specific Gravity or temperature
exceeding those stated above shall be approved by the Engineer.
Maximum spacing of hangers and supports shall be as follows:
Support Spacing, Feet
Nominal Pipe Ductile
Copper Iron Plastic Steel
Diameter, (inches)
1/2 4.0 N/A 3.5 4.5
3/ 4.0 N/A 4.0 5.0
1 4.0 N/A 4.5 5.5
1'/ 6.0 N/A 5.0 6.5
1'/2 6.0 N/A 5.0 7.5
2 6.0 N/A 5.5 8.0
2'/2 6.0 N/A 5.5 8.0
3 6.0 N/A 6.0 8.0
4 N/A 8.0 7.0 8.0
Larger than 4 N/A See Note N/A See
Note
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400507- Page 5

Note: Spacing shall be 10 feet maximum but may be increased depending
on pipe size. Refer to AWWA standard of practice.
D. Supporting Vertical Piping:
1. Support at a maximum of 10-feet spacing.
2. Support at all points necessary to ensure rigid installation with adequate
provisions to allow expansion and contraction and prevent vibration.
3. Support by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets, or wall rests.
E. Supporting PVC:
1. Support in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations for the conditions of operation, temperature, and size of
pipe.
2. Support in a manner which will prevent subsequent visible sagging of the
pipe between supports due to plastic deformation.
F. Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping: Support by adjustable hangers.
G. Valves, Fittings, and Specialties: Independently support pipe, valves, and
specialties connected to pumps and equipment.
H. Temporary Pipe Supports:
1. Lay out each section of pipeline and make connections while the pipe is
held in temporary supports.
2. After the completion of connections in each section of pipeline, hold the
section in place with temporary clamps.
3. Do not remove the temporary clamps until the piping is correctly installed
on the permanent supports.
3.2 PAINTING
A. All fabricated steel or cast iron pipe supports, saddles, brackets, rolls, clevises
and the like shall be painted, after installation, as specified in Sections 099000 —
Painting.
END OF SECTION 400507
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400507- Page 6

SECTION 400551 VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plug Valves.
2. Check Valves.
3. Butterfly Valves
4. Ball Valves.
5. Globe Valves.
6. Valve Accessories.
B. Some products specified in this Section may not be required for this Contract.
Refer to piping system Specification section(s) and Drawings to determine
particular products to be provided under this Contract.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute
B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
C. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers
D. AWWA: American Water Works Association
E. ISO: International Organization for Standardization
F. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society
G. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacture's Association
H. NSF: National Sanitation Foundation
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data and Shop Drawings:
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400551- Page 1

1. Submit in accordance with Section 013300 in sufficient detail to confirm
compliance with the Drawings and this Section.
2. Submittal shall, at a minimum, include the items listed below.
a. Manufacturer's product data for each type of valve.
b. Motor data. Submit in accordance with Section 110513.
c. Coating systems. Submit in accordance with Section 099000.
d. Valve schedule. Identify all valves by type number, pipeline,
location, joint type, manufacturer, and model or catalog number.
B. Instructional Services Documentation:
1. Submit in accordance with Section 016000.
C. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data:
1. Submit in accordance with Section 017823
D. Provide AIS certification.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer shall be responsible for all components identified for each valve
type, accessory, and actuator specified in this Section.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall furnish written one year standard warranty from date of
substantial completion to guarantee there shall be no defects in material or
workmanship in any item supplied.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All equipment and parts shipped to the job site shall be properly protected from
the elements so that no damage or deterioration occurs from the time of
delivery to the time when the installation is completed and the units are placed
into operation.
B. Manufacturer shall define the requirements to properly protect the equipment
and parts shipped to the job site.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400551-Page 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All valves shall be complete with all necessary operating hand wheels, chain
wheels, extension stems, worm and gear operators, operating nuts, chains,
wrenches, and other accessories that are required for proper completion of
Work included under this section.
B. Valves installed in insulated piping systems shall be furnished with extended
stem as required to allow operation of valve without damage to, or interference
with, insulation system.
C. Unless otherwise shown, valves shall be same size as adjoining pipe.
D. All units shall have name of manufacturer and size of valve cast on body or
bonnet or shown on permanently attached plate in raised letters.
E. Service for all items specified herein are shown on Drawings or in
Specifications. Note, this is a general specification; some types listed herein
may not be part of the Work.
2.2 CHECK VALVES
A. PVC Ball Check Valve
1. Manufacturers:
a. Spears Manufacturing.
b. Hayward Industrial Products, Inc.
c. Asahi/America
d. Or equal.
2. Ball check valve.
3. Provide sizes as indicated on Drawings.
4. PVC construction, ASTM D1784.
5. Valve shall be true union type.
6. Provide with socket weld joints.
7. Viton seats and seals.
8. 0-rings shall be EPDM.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400551-Page 3

9. All valve unions and nuts shall have Buttress threads.
10. Valve shall be suitable for installation in the vertical or horizontal position.
11. Rated for 150-psi at 73 deg F.
B. Disc Check Valve
1. Manufacturers:
a. Val-Matic
b. Cla-val
c. Or equal.
2. Furnish and install sizes as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Valves shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C518.
4. For use in potable water systems, valves shall be certified lead-free in
accordance with NSF/ANSI 61.
5. Valves shall be wafer-style for installation between flanges as specified
within other sections.
6. The valve body shall be constructed of ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12
ductile iron. The disc shall be cast bronze with Type 316 stainless steel
pivot and stop pins. The torsion spring shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
The valve shall incorporate a Buna-N seal.
7. Valves shall have a maximum cracking pressure of 0.25 psi.
2.3 BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR AIR SERVICE
A. Butterfly valves shall be high performance lugged style 316 stainless steel body
ASTM A351 Type CF8M, ANSI B16 with a solid 316 stainless steel shaft and
disc. Fabric PTFE bearings, PTFE/Titanium seat and PTFE V-flex packing shall
be provided.
B. Valves shall be fully assembled and tested with their actuators prior to
shipment.
C. Valves shall be manufactured by Bray, Pratt, Keystone, DeZurik or equal.
2.4 BALL VALVES
A. PVC, Socket-Weld Ball Valve
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400551- Page 4

1. Manufacturers:
a. Spears Manufacturing.
b. Nibco.
c. Hayward Industrial Products, Inc.
d. Or equal.
2. 3-inch and smaller.
3. Provide sizes as indicated on Drawings.
4. PVC construction, ASTM D1784.
5. Valve shall be true union type.
6. Provide with socket weld joints.
7. Full-port.
8. Vented Ball.
9. PTFE ball seats.
10. 0-rings shall be EPDM.
11. All valve unions and nuts shall have Buttress threads.
12. Rated for 150-psi at 73 deg F.
13. Unless indicated otherwise, provide with double-stop polypropylene
handle operator.
B. Stainless Steel, Threaded Water Service Ball Valve
1. Manufacturers:
a. Apollo
b. Nibco
c. DeZurik
d. Or Equal.
2. 3-inch and smaller for water service on stainless steel piping systems.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400551-Page 5

3. Comply with MSS-SP-110.
4. Conventional port, two-piece stainless steel body for threaded valves.
5. Conventional port, three-piece stainless steel body for socket weld
valves.
6. Stainless steel ball and stem.
7. Reinforced TFE Seats.
8. 1000 psi CWP.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Valve Actuators:
1. Open by turning counter-clockwise.
2. Valves with centerline 5-feet 6-inch or less above operating floor:
Handwheel for gear- actuated valves, lever for lever-actuated valves.
Shall require no more than 40-pound effort to unseat valve.
3. Valves 4-inch and larger, unless otherwise noted on drawings, with
centerline greater than 5-feet 6-inch above operating floor: Chainwheel.
4. Valves 4-inch and smaller, maximum operating pressure 25 psig and
less: Lever.
5. Valves 4-inch and smaller, maximum operating pressure greater than 25
psig: Gear.
6. Valves 6-inch and larger: Gear.
B. Buried and Submerged Valves:
1. Provide seals on shafts and gaskets on valve and actuator covers to
prevent water entry.
2. Provide totally enclosed actuator mounting brackets with gasket seals.
C. Valve Boxes:
1. Provide for buried valves.
2. Three-piece screw type, cast iron box and cover.
3. Valve box diameter 5 '/4-inch, length as required for installation.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400551-Page 6

4. Provide 316L stainless steel extension stem as required for installation
and 2-inch operating nut located within 6-inches from top of cover.
D. Worm and Gear Actuators:
1. Totally enclosed design.
2. Sized for valve operation under valve rated pressure with pull of 40-
pounds on handwheel or chain wheel.
3. Self-locking to prevent valve position creep.
4. Hardened alloy steel worm.
5. Reduction gearing runs in lubricant.
6. Orient operators to avoid interference with adjacent piping, equipment,
and structures.
7. Include valve position indication.
2.6 COATINGS
A. Manufacturer is responsible for surface preparation and application of first coat
(prime coat) of equipment prior to shipment. Coatings shall comply with
Section 099000.
B. Contractor shall provide finish coats at Project Site. Finish coat products shall
be manufactured by same manufacturer of first coat (prime coat).
C. Stainless steel, bronze, and nonmetallic surfaces shall not be coated.
D. Coat machined or bearing surfaces and holes with protective grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations and
approved submittals.
B. Bolt holes of flanged valves shall straddle the vertical centerline of the pipe run.
Before installing flanged valves, the flanged faces shall be thoroughly cleaned.
After cleaning, insert gasket and bolts, and tighten the nuts progressively and
uniformly. If flanges leak under pressure, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts,
reseat or replace the gasket, retighten and/or reinstall the nuts and bolts, and
retest the joints.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400551-Page 7

C. Provide equipment identification marker complete with equipment name and
tag number. Coordinate field location with Engineer.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:
1. Pressure test valves at same time connected piping is tested.
2. Repair leaking joints.
3. Protect parts of valves and actuators that could be damaged by test.
END OF SECTION 400551
July 2021 Project#19.00305 400551-Page 8

SECTION 401223 AERATION PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Modified General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work included under this Section consists of furnishing and installing the
aeration piping and appurtenances for the transmission and distribution of
compressed air as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Aeration
piping shall be ductile iron, black steel or galvanized steel as shown on the
drawings.
B. Unless otherwise noted, all materials and equipment supplied under this
Section shall be new, of good quality, and in good condition.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All aeration piping shall be provided by a single manufacturer, with at least five
(5) years of experience in manufacturing ductile iron, black steel or galvanized
steel pipe.
B. All piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified
testing agency.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit complete shop drawings to Engineer for review and
approval to include at least the following:
1. Descriptive literature and catalog cut data.
2. Manufacturer's certification of factory tests.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 401223—Page 1

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall coordinate material deliveries with the
manufacturer/supplier. All materials shall be handled and stored in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations using methods that will prevent
damage to the materials.
B. The Contractor shall unload pipe and appurtenances so as to avoid deformation
or other injury thereto. Pipe shall not be placed within pipe of a larger size and
shall not be rolled or dragged over gravel or rock during handling. If any
defective material is discovered after installation, it shall be removed and
replaced with sound pipe or shall be repaired by the Contractor in an approved
manner and at his own expense.
C. The Contractor shall store all pipe and appurtenances on sills above storm
drainage level and deliver for installation after the trench is excavated.
D. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
E. Handle all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
F. When any material is damaged during transporting, unloading, handling or
storing, the undamaged portions may be used as needed, or, if damaged
sufficiently, the Engineer will reject the material as being unfit for installation.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall warrant the material to be free of defects in
workmanship or material for a period of one (1) year from the date of final
acceptance by the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Above Ground Piping:
1. Ductile Iron Pipe: Aeration piping shall be flanged, unlined Class 53
ductile iron pipe conforming to ANSI/AWWA C150/A21 .50.
2. Fittings: Fittings shall be flanged ductile iron, compact fittings, with a
minimum 250 psi pressure rating.
3. Gaskets: Gaskets shall be EPDM, rated for 250 degree F temperature
and suitable for compressed air transmission service.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 401223—Page 2

B. Underground Piping:
1. Ductile Iron Pipe: Buried air piping shall be unlined and have mechanical
restrained joints and shall be pressure class 350.
2.2 STEEL PIPE, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. All steel aeration piping shall be standard weight, Schedule 40 welded or
seamless pipes of USA manufacture without an interior lining and shall conform
to the requirements of ASTM Specification A 53. Pipe shall be hot-dipped, zinc
coated unless specifically indicated to be black.
B. Steel pipe fittings shall conform to ANSI B16.3.
C. Flanges shall be rated at 125 PSI and conform to ANSI B16.5.
D. Steel pipe unions shall conform to ANSI B16.39.
E. Expansion Joints shall be compound, galvanized steel fittings with a telescoping
body and slip-pipe section. Include packing rings, packing, limit rods, chrome-
plated finish on slip-pipe sections, and flanged ends.
F. Unless otherwise noted, all fittings, flanges, unions, and accessories, unless
otherwise noted, shall be wrought steel, cast steel, or malleable iron having a
minimum working pressure of 150 psi.
G. Above-Ground and Underground Piping:
1. 4 inches and Smaller (Galvanized Steel Pipe or Black Steel Pipe):
a. Steel pipe and fittings shall utilize threaded and coupled joints.
2. 6 inches and Larger (Black Steel Pipe):
a. Steel pipe and fittings shall utilize plain end, welded or flanged joints.
2.3 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Pipe 8" and smaller shall be Schedule 40 and larger than 8" shall be Schedule
10.
B. Pipes shall be manufactured from ASTM-A240 annealed and pickled sheets
and plates and shall conform to ASTM-A312 in Grade TP 304L stainless steel.
Pipe shall be manufactured to nominal pipe sizes as listed in ANSI B36.19. All
stainless steel pipes shall have a maximum temperature of 300 degrees.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 401223-Page 3

C. Fittings shall be butt weld type manufactured in accordance with ASTM A-403
of the same grade (alloy) and in the same thickness as the pipe. Long radius
elbows (i.e. centerline to end of elbow equals 1.5 times the nominal pipe size)
up to 24-inch diameter shall be smooth flow type. Reducers may be straight
tapered, cone type. Tees, crosses, laterals and wyes may be shop fabricated
from the specified pipe.
D. The finish on the raw material, manufactured to ASTM-A240 will be No. 1 ,
HRAP (hot rolled annealed and pickled) or better. The finish on the completed
pipe and fittings shall be as specified in ASTM-A312 and A-403, respectively.
E. Pipes shall be straight within a maximum 1/8-inch tolerance within 10-linear feet.
F. All pieces shall be marked with gauge and type of stainless steel.
2.4 COATINGS:
A. The exterior of all above ground aeration piping not exposed to wastewater
shall include a rust inhibitor primer (2.5 mil, DFT), and two (2) coats of alkide
(1 .5 mils DFT per coat). The exterior of all above ground aeration piping
subject to wastewater submergence or splashing shall have an epoxy primer
(5.0 mils DFT), and one coat of coal tar epoxy (10 mils DFT).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Interruption of Existing Aeration Service: Do not interrupt aeration service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
conditions:
1 . Notify Owner not less than three (3) days in advance of proposed
interruption of aeration service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of aeration service without Owner's
written permission.
3. If required by Owner, provide temporary aeration service as required to
maintain necessary service to existing facilities.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Installation of aeration piping shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the installation
instructions to the Engineer if so requested.
B. Install aeration piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of airflow.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 401223-Page 4

C. Install eccentric reducers where piping is reduced in direction of flow, with
bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.
D. Install branch connections to aeration mains from top of main. Provide drain leg
and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.
E. Install flexible pipe connector on each connection to air compressors/blowers.
3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install a shutoff valve at each connection to and from aeration equipment and
accessories. Install strainer if indicated.
B. When indicated, install check valves to maintain correct direction of air flow to
and from aeration piping, equipment and accessories.
C. Install safety valves where recommended by equipment manufacturers.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Threaded Joints:
1. Threaded joints shall be made perfectly tight with a stiff mixture of graphite
and mineral oil, or an approved, non-toxic, non-hardening, pipe joint
compound applied to the male threads only.
2. All exposed threads, wrench marks, or other damage to the zinc coating,
shall be protected by the application of two coats of a heavy consistency,
bituminous paint, or with two wraps of an approved vinyl or poly vinyl
pressure sensitive tape. Bituminous paint shall be applied. Tape shall be
0.010 inches thick and installed over a primer as recommended by the
manufacturer.
B. Welded Joints:
1. Pipe ends shall be provided to suit the field joints indicated on the
drawings. Field welded joints shall be single (outside) lap or butt type.
2. Field welding shall conform to AWWA Standard C 206.
C. Use dielectric fittings for joints in dissimilar metal piping materials.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, equipment and
accessories.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 401223-Page 5

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and accessories to allow for service and
maintenance.
C. Connect piping to equipment and accessories with shutoff valve and union or
flanged connection.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Piping Leak Testing: Test new and modified parts of existing piping. Cap and
fill aeration piping with oil-free dry air to pressure of 15 psig above system
operating pressure, but not less than 50 psig. Isolate test source and let stand
for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test
pressure; hold for a minimum of two (2) hours with no drop in pressure. Repair
leaks and repeat test until no leaks exist. The Contractor shall provide
additional system valves to isolate sections of the system for testing if so
desired.
END OF SECTION 401223
July 2021 Project#19.00305 401223-Page 6

SECTION 431133 ROTARY LOBE COMPRESSORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install
complete, ready for operation and field-test one (1) new rotary lobe
compressors and appurtenances, as shown on the Drawings and as specified
herein.
B. The entire package and its components shall comply with all applicable safety and
environmental regulations.
1.2. RELATED WORK
A. Valves, except as otherwise specified herein, are included in Section 400551 -
Valves and Appurtenances.
B. Instrumentation work, except as otherwise specified herein, is included in
Division 26.
C. Electrical work, except as otherwise specified herein, is included in Division 26.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this
Section. Submittals shall include at least the following information:
1 . Certified general arrangement drawings showing materials, details of
construction, dimensions and connections.
2. Complete Performance Data at the Design Point and all specified
operating points including:
a. Actual Operating Speed (RPM) and % of maximum rated speed
b. Capacity — scfm and icfm
c. Design inlet conditions, pressure, temperature and relative humidity(%)
d. Discharge pressure
e. dB(A) noise pressure level
f. Blower Shaft HP, Motor HP and Package HP
3. List of recommended spare parts broken down into on hand parts and
long term for 2 years operation and 3 to 5 years operation.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 431133- Page 1

4. Descriptive Brochures
5. Motor Data
6. Instrumentation and Wiring Diagram
7. ISO-1217 Factory Performance Test Results. Slip test results shall not
be unacceptable as an alternate. Manufacturer shall provide
documented results for the purchased machines. Typical or average data
shall not be acceptable.
8. ISO-8573-1 Class Zero Oil Free Certificate
9. Declaration of Conformity, per Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC, Annex II,
No.1 A.
B. Complete blower package operating and maintenance instructions
professionally published, hard copy and electronic copy, shall be furnished for
all equipment included under these specifications.
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Package shall be Aerzen Delta Hybrid Model D76S. Regardless of
manufacturer, the package shall be produced by the manufacturer of the
blower stage, to ensure single source responsibility for blower
performance and compatibility of associated accessories. Packagers
shall not be permitted to bid.
2. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in
9
accordance with the best practices and methods and shall operate
satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings.
3. The rotary lobe compressors shall be covered by a warranty for 24
months from date of commissioning, or 30 months from date of shipment,
whichever occurs first.
1.5. BLOWER PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Quantity of Machines 1
2. Design Inlet Temperature 100 °F
3. Site elevation 2,500 ft
4. Design Inlet Pressure 13.41 psia
July 2021 Project#19.00305 431133- Page 2

5. Design Relative Humidity (%) 80 %
6. Design Flow 2,079/2,541 scfm/icfm
7. Minimum Turndown 749/915 scfm/icfm
8. Design Discharge Pressure 12.50 psig
9. Brake Horsepower (Max) 139.6 bHp
10. Motor Size (Max) 200 Hp
11. Free Field Noise Guarantee (at design point) 75 dB(A) at 1 meter
(1) Package BHP to include pressure loss through a clean inlet filter/ silencer,
pressure loss of the exhaust silencer and check valve.
(2) Package Performance shall be guaranteed to ISO 1217 with a tolerance is +/-
5% on volume flow and +/- 5% on package horsepower. Manufacturer of blower
shall provide data for purchased machine.
(3) Sound data shall be from an ISO 2151 method of measurement, in an ISO
3745 qualified test facility. Sound data shall be compliant with a Declaration of
Conformity assessment standard.
1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All equipment shall be completely factory assembled, skid mounted, crated and
delivered to protect against damage during shipment.
B. All exposed flanges shall be covered and sealed with shrink-wrap to prevent
the entrance of moisture or debris. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted
shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion.
C. All equipment delivered to the site shall be stored as specified in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.7. MAINTENANCE
A. Spare Parts
1 . Furnish the following spare parts for each blower package specified:
a. Complete set of matched V-belts
b. One inlet air filter element
c. One oil filter element
d. One volume of oil for first service interval
July 2021 Project#19.00305 431133- Page 3

2. Spare parts shall be properly bound and labeled for easy identification
without opening the packaging.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. GENERAL
A. Rotary Lobe Compressor Packages shall be designed to minimize the life-cycle
costs and maximize plant reliability. The design and the selection of the
components shall be based on a minimum useful life of 20 years and a Mean
Time Between Overhauls of 5 years of continuous operation. Bearing life shall
be submitted by manufacturer of the blower stage, based on specified
conditions.
B. No special foundations shall be required. The packages will be installed
directly on a concrete slab without grouting the base frame. There shall only be
4 easily accessible anchor points.
C. Manufacturer shall guarantee that the rotary lobe compressor shall provide oil-
free operation and be certified to ISO 8573-1 Class Zero.
D. Blower Casing:
1. The casing shall be of one-piece construction, with separate sideplates
that are bolted and pinned to the housing.
2. Casing materials shall be close-grained cast iron ASTM A48 suitably
ribbed to prevent distortion under the specified operating conditions.
3. Inlet and outlet shall be flanged connections, not threaded.
4. Airflow shall be vertical top to bottom with inlet and outlet connections
offset so that the flow travel horizontally across the blower stage.
Casings that do not utilize a horizontal internal flow shall not be allowed.
5. The vibration level as measured at the casing, in the X/Y planes of the
bearings, shall not exceed 0.3 "/ sec RMS when operating at the
specified operating pressure and speed. The vibration level shall be
checked at start-up and documented in the field start up report.
E. Factory Testing:
1. Each rotary lobe compressor stage shall be factory performance tested in
accordance with ISO 1217 standards to verify flow and brake
horsepower. A slip test shall not be acceptable, nor is average data for
the manufactured size.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 431133-Page 4

2. The acceptance criteria are +5% tolerance on power and —5% tolerance
on flow regardless of the size of the machine.
3. The manufacturer shall submit free field noise data for the complete
blower package. The results have been obtained using an ISO 2151
method of measurement, in an ISO 3745 qualified test facility. The
performance data shall include a Declaration of Conformity, per
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC, Annex II, No.1 A.
F. Rotors:
1 . Each rotor (male and female) shall be of the "stiff' design with first lateral
critical speed at least 120% of the maximum allowable operating speed.
2. The rotors shall operate without rubbing nor shall they require lubrication.
3. Rotors shall be drop forged in one single piece of AISI 1043 or
equivalent, machined to final tolerance. Minimum material tensile
strength shall be 620Mpa. Lesser precision cast iron rotors with surface
coatings shall NOT be accepted.
4. Open rotors shall not be acceptable.
5. For maximum strength and reliability, the female rotor shall be driven by
the drive motor and the male rotor shall be driven by the timing gear set.
Stages that utilize a male driven rotor shall not be accepted.
6. A male and female rotor configuration with internal compression ratio and
axial flow entry must be used to increase the adiabatic efficiency of the
blower stage. Twisted rotor profiles applied for pulsation cancelation only
shall not be allowed. Radial flow entry type rotors shall not be allowed.
7. Only precision-machined rotors with sealing strips to optimize clearance
and performance shall be accepted. Manufacturers using coated rotors
are required to include the following additional services in their proposal,
with a broken out adder to their proposed cost:
a. For the first 5 years of service, the manufacturer (not the packager) will
visit the site. Each machine will be shut down and visually inspected for
evidence of degradation. Inspection will include clearance measurement
with feeler gauges. An annual report will be submitted, including
photographs, for each machine.
b. An annual performance test will be performed on site, including flow and
power measurement, for each machine. The results will be compared to
the original ISO-1217 test results for each machine, and a report
submitted to the owner and the engineer.
c. Any sign of performance loss or coating degradation will be monitored. If
the engineer or owner determine that the results pose a threat to the
reliability of the aeration system over the first five years, the
July 2021 Project#19.00305 431133- Page 5

manufacturer will, at their own expense (including parts and labor)
replace the designated compressor stage, or overhaul and recoat the
existing stage, depending on the number of units affected by the
degradation.
8. Rotors shall be statically and dynamically balanced per ISO1940/ANSI
S2.19 G2.5.
G. Bearings:
1. Each rotor/shaft shall be supported by anti-friction bearings, and fixed to
control the axial location of the rotor/shaft in the unit.
2. Regardless of theoretical bearing life calculations, the bearings shall be
sized for a minimum expected life of 5 years between overhauls.
H. Timing Gears:
1. The rotors shall be timed by a pair of single helical gears with quality
equivalent to AGMA 12. Spur cut gears shall not be acceptable.
2. Gears shall have hardened and ground teeth and a minimum AGMA
service factor of 1.70.
3. Gears shall be mounted via hydraulic expansion onto the shafts with a
tapered interference fit, and secured by a locknut. Pinned gears shall not
be acceptable.
I. Seals:
1. Seals shall be designed to prevent lubricant from leaking into the air
stream as well as to prevent oil from leaking out of the machine.
2. The seal shall be a cartridge type consist of two rotary slip rings mounted
in a retainer on the air end, an atmospheric air gap in the center with top
and bottom ventilation and a noncontact labyrinth seal with no wearing
parts on the oil end. Internal lip seals shall not be permitted.
3. The rotor input shaft shall have a noncontact labyrinth seal with no
wearing parts.
J. Lubrication:
1. The timing gears and the bearings shall be oil lubricated. Grease
lubrication shall be not acceptable.
K. Oil Sight Glass:
1. An oil sight glass shall be provided on the exterior of the noise enclosure
so the operator can easily view the oil level.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 431133-Page 6

2. Sight glasses inside the enclosure or that cannot be easily viewed by the
operator shall not be acceptable.
L. Painting:
1 . Painting shall be per supplier's standard meeting the following criteria:
a. Except for machined sealing and machined mounting surfaces, the
package shall be painted dark blue.
b. Aluminum, stainless steel, and brass shall not be painted.
c. The supplied motor shall not be over sprayed and will be supplied with
the motor manufacturer's standard protection and paint color.
d. Painted Cast Iron and Carbon Steel shall be Alkyd Resin Primer and
Final coat with a total dry film thickness of 70Dm. Surface preparation
SSPC10 or better.
e. Sound enclosure shall be powder-coated polyester base total dry film
thickness 80 m.
f. Galvanized components shall only be painted with appropriate surface
preparation
2.2. BLOWER ACCESSORIES
A. Inlet Filter/ Silencer:
1. Each package shall be supplied with one combination inlet filter and
silencer.
2. The inlet filter silencer shall be mounted directly to the inlet flange of the
blower.
3. The filter media efficiency shall meet the requirements of ASHRAE 52.2
MERV7 50-70% @3-10 microns corresponding to EN779 G4.
4. The silencer portion shall be located upstream of the inlet filter.
5. The filter element shall be designed to trap dirt on the inside so that upon
changing, dirt does not fall into the machinery. Filters where dirt
accumulates on the external surface of the filter shall not be permitted.
6. Filter and silencer performance losses (clean element) shall be included
in the entire package performance calculation.
B. Base Frame / Discharge Silencer:
1 . Each package shall be supplied with one combination base frame /
discharge silencer.
2. The silencer shall be a chamber type design for maximum sound
July 2021 Project#19.00305 431133-Page 7

attenuation and shall not use internally any absorption materials of any
kind (fibrous or otherwise). Internal absorption material has been shown
to degrade, reduce the attenuation quality of the silencer, and internally
foul diffusers. Silencers that utilize internal absorption material shall not
be permitted.
3. The silencer shall be fabricated of a
single shell of pressure vessel
9
quality steel with continuous welds.
4. The silencer must be subject to a pressure test for tightness and strength
at a minimum of 1.65 times the maximum design pressure.
5. The silencer shall have a machined flanged inlet connection and bolt
directly to the discharge flange of the rotary lobe compressor, with no
intermediary or interconnecting pieces. Threaded connection between
the compressor stage and the discharge silencer is subject to leakage
and misalignment, and shall not be permitted.
6. Discharge silencer performance losses shall be included in the entire
package pressure calculation. Blower accessories shall be supplied by
the manufacturer of the blower stage.
7. The base frame shall be constructed from welded carbon steel that shall
be designed to maintain alignment of the blower internal components and
the drive during operation.
8. The base frame shall be designed to resist distortion while being installed
on vibration isolating mounts.
9. The manufacturer shall supply a stainless steel grounding lug fully
welded to the base.
C. Flexible Connectors:
1. Each package shall be provided with a flexible ANSI style discharge
connector and upstream of the inlet silencer..
2. Flexible connectors shall prevent the transmission of noise and vibrations
from the blower package into the piping.
3. Flexible discharge connectors shall be Proco Style 240, Type EE, EPDM,
with a standard ANSI flange discharge connection, rated for 300 °F at 20
psig. Soft face range with galvanized split ring reinforcement.
D. Electric Motor:
1. Each package shall be supplied with a WEG manufactured TEFC NEMA
Premium Efficiency motor that shall operate on 460 Volts, 3 Phase, 60
Hertz current, 3600 RPM. Operation of motors above 60 Hertz shall not
be allowed under any circumstance.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 431133-Page 8

2. Motors shall be horizontal, foot mounted, rigid base, Torque NEMA B,
Temperature rise Class B, TEFC IP55, water tight and dust tight
enclosure.
3. Class F, inverter rated insulation, Class H applied varnish, 3:1 constant
torque VFD-duty.
4. Regreasable bearings, positive pressure lubrication system with
automatic drawn plugs — pressure compensated (frame sizes 254T and
larger).
5. All frame sizes shall be domestic NEMA standard frame sizes, suitable
for overhung belt drive and with the conduit box on top of the motor. IEC
frame motors shall not be allowed.
6. The motor will be mounted on a pivoting base to provide automatic
tensioning of the belts. The motor nominal rating after any corrections for
ambient conditions shall be 10°A) above the maximum operating
horsepower.
7. The motor shall have a 1.25 service factor for sizes up to 100 HP and a
1.15 service factor for sizes above 100 HP.
8. Motor windings shall be supplied with a normally closed thermostat, one
per phase, wired in series to form a fail-safe motor protection circuit for
the external fault circuit of the motor controller on all frame sizes at or
above 324T. Thermostat shall be a Klixon Precision Thermostat by
Sensata Technologies.
9. Motors shall be equipped with an Aegis ring and insulated NDE bearing
to mitigate the effects of stray motor currents.
10. Blower manufacturer shall be responsible for coordinating the starting
torque requirement of the blower and the motor.
11. The use of the TEFC motor to cool the blower system or circulate the
enclosure air shall not be allowed.
12. Regardless of VFD supply, the manufacturer shall publish the VFD
program settings in the submittal documentation to verify operation is
within the intended RPM range of the motor.
13. Under no circumstances shall operation above 60Hz be permitted to
achieve the required flow rate. Motor operation shall be limited to a
maximum of 60Hz by the motor controller.
E. V-Belt Drive:
1. Each package shall be supplied with a V-belt drive that shall be of the
high capacity type, oil and heat resistant.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 431133-Page 9

2. Drive shall be designed for a minimum service factor of 1.4 times
operating power (bHp), or 1.1 times the motor nameplate Hp, whichever
is larger to allow a minimum of 1.4-service factor based on the maximum
blower bHp.
3. Belt tensioning shall be automatic without the use of any spring devices
or interaction on the part of the operator. Slide rails or spring tensioners
shall not be used as a tensioning device.
4. Sheaves shall be dynamically balanced regardless of the operating
speed and hydraulically mounted on the compressor drive shaft.
5. The automatic tensioning system shall yield a v-belt life of 16,000 hrs of
operation.
F. Belt Guard:
1. The belt drive shall be guarded in compliance with OSHA regulations.
2. Portions of the guard shall be easily removable allowing for belt
inspection and replacement.
3. Guard material shall be perforated galvanized carbon steel.
G. Vibration Isolators:
1. Each package shall be supplied with vibration isolating feet with a
minimum efficiency of 80%.
2. The manufacturer shall be responsible for attenuating noise and vibration
in the package such that no special installation base shall be required,
nor shall any additional measures be required to reduce vibrations from
the package being transmitted to the base or the piping.
H. Pressure Safety Valve:
1. Each package shall be supplied with a single pressure safety valve on
the discharge side of the blower mounted downstream of the discharge
silencer and upstream of the check valve.
2. The safety valve shall be set to protect the machine from exceeding its
maximum pressure rating, and shall be sized to pass 100% of the design
flow.
3. The valve shall be field adjustable, spring loaded, and have a certificate
of conformity to PED if operating above 15 psig.
4. The pressure safety valve shall be housed inside and attenuated by the
sound enclosure. The safety valve shall relieve hot air into a segmented
and sealed section of the sound enclosure so that the hot air cannot
July 2021 Project#19.00305 431133-Page 10

reenter the inlet of the machine. Weighted relief valves inside the
enclosure shall not be permitted. Diaphragm electronically actuated relief
valves shall not be permitted.
5. The valve shall be manufactured by Aerzen.
Check Valve:
1 . Each package shall be supplied with one check valve that shall be
installed on the discharge line.
2. The check valve shall be of the full-bore low pressure-drop, flapper type
design with a steel body, and steel flap embedded in EPDM with full-
contact seal. Applications with a continuous discharge temperature of
275°F will require the steel flap embedded in Silicone with a full-contract
seal
3. The valve shall be easily removable without disturbing the piping. Check
valves requiring installation in the discharge piping shall not be
considered, unless installation cost of the external valve is included in
supplier's proposal.
4. Pressure losses produced by the check valve shall be included in the
entire package performance calculation.
5. The check valve shall be manufactured by Aerzen.
J. Local Control Panel:
1 . Each package shall be supplied with the following control functions and
features:
a. Intuitive TFT color touch screen display
b. Display, monitoring, alarm, and shutdown of inlet pressure, discharge
pressure, discharge temperature, enclosure cooling fan thermal
overload, main drive motor thermal overload, oil temperature and oil
pressure.
c. Display run hours
d. Log errors and first out indication
e. Track and log maintenance
f. E-Stop button mounted on front of blower enclosure
g. Operation of enclosure cooling fan motor starter and oil demister
h. Ability to transfer measured values, fault and status messages, as well
as remaining times of the service intervals to the customer control
system via Ethernet IP.
i. Permissive control function of customer start and stop signals to a
motor controller
July 2021 Project#19.00305 431133-Page 11
- J

j. The local control panel shall be provided with the following digital
outputs:
i. Common alarm
ii. Common fault
iii. Ready to run
iv. Transfer of external start/stop command
v. Status remote
vi. Alternatively, these outputs can be obtained using the
communication protocol
k. The local control panel shall be provided with the following digital
inputs:
i. Remote start/stop
ii. Motor controller fault
iii. Customer E-stop
iv. Alternatively, these inputs can be supplied using the
communication protocol
2. Control Enclosure
a. IP54 suitable for indoor/outdoor installation
b. NEMA 12
c. Factory installed, integral to sound enclosure
3. Control Supply Power
a. 460 VAC, 10 Amp feed with 24 VDC transformer
4. Monitoring Sensors
a. Inlet Pressure Transducer
b. Discharge Pressure Transducer
c. PT 1,000 Discharge Temperature RTD
d. PT 1 ,000 Oil Temperature RTD
e. Oil Pressure Transducer
5. Local control panel shall be the Aerzen AERtronic Digital Controller
K. Each blower shall receive its initial oil filling at the factory. Oil to be fully
synthetic and rated for 16,000 hours of operation between change intervals.
L. Acoustical Sound Enclosure:
1 . Each package shall be supplied with a sound enclosure covering the
July 2021 Project#19.00305 431133- Page 12

entire blower package.
2. The enclosure shall provide suitable protection for outdoor installation
under wind loads of 50mph and snow loads of 251bs/ft2.
3. The enclosure shall be designed so as to be able to install them side-by-
side with all maintenance done from the front or back of the package.
4. Details shall be as follows:
a. Enclosure Panels shall be made of galvanized steel sheet, powder
coated in a light reflecting, blue color per RAL 5001 . The skid shall be of
the same color.
b. The enclosure and the blower package shall both be mounted on a skid/
oil-drip pan designed for meeting environment protection standards and
for easy transportation and installation.
c. A grounding strap shall be installed between the blower base and the
package skid to bypass any vibration isolating mounts for grounding
continuity.
d. Quick release panels, each less than 50 lb (as mandated by MSHA)
must provide easy and quick access for routine maintenance of the
blower and the package components.
e. Enclosure Cooling / Ventilation Fan:
i. Ventilation fan shall be provided for cooling the sound enclosure.
ii. The fan shall be sized for sufficient heat removal from the sound
enclosure, even when the blower is operated with a VFD.
iii. The cooling fan shall be driven separately by a 460V, 3Ph, 60Hz
electric motor powered by the same 460 VAC electric feed as the
local control panel. A 120V single phase motor for this application
will not be acceptable as the current draw and motor operating
temperature are too high.
iv. The enclosure cooling fan shall be a dedicated device. The use
of the TEFC drive motor to cool the blower or circulate the sound
enclosure shall not be allowed.
f. To prevent possible operator damage, electrical components,
instrumentation and instrument connections shall not be mounted or
interface with moving panels of the sound enclosure.
g. Both blower oil sumps shall be piped to a common fill and drain, located
at the front of the package for easy maintenance. An oil level indicator
shall be mounted on the outside of the enclosure, which gives an
accurate oil level indication while the blower is in operation. All oil lines
shall be industrial-quality hydraulic hose and fittings.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 431133- Page 13

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall install the rotary lobe compressors in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. The Contractor shall make all electrical and process connections to the blower
package prior to the arrival of the manufacturer's representative.
C. Manufacturer's authorized service technician shall verify proper installation,
electrical connections and equipment alignment prior to start up.
3.2. FIELD SERVICE & TESTING
A. After installation of all equipment has been completed and as soon as
conditions permit, the manufacturer shall provide one (1) trip for a total of one
(1) - 8-hour days to verify the installation and conduct an acceptance test under
actual operating conditions.
1. The Manufacturer shall perform a physical check of the blower
installation, perform safety checks, power up the equipment and perform
functional testing.
2. The functional test shall consist of 4 hours of operation of each blower
with vibration, temperature, and pressure readings as well as motor amp
readings taken and recorded at 60-minute intervals.
3. The Manufacturer shall provide operations and maintenance training to
the plant personnel. The training shall consist of 1 hour of classroom
training using the Operation and Maintenance Manual for reference and 2
hours of hands-on training at the blower package.
B. If required, Contractor shall make any changes, at his own expense, to the
installation that may be necessary to assure satisfactory operation. Contractor
shall be held liable for changes needed in the installation.
C. Manufacturer shall provide a written field test / start up report after completion
of testing.
END OF SECTION 431133
July 2021 Project#19.00305 431133-Page 14

SECTION 465131 FLEXIBLE MEMBRANE TUBE DIFFUSERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section includes the design, manufacture, installation and start-up of a
flexible membrane, fine pore aeration system including in-basin aeration
components as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. The aeration system manufacturer shall provide single source responsibility for
the complete aeration system including blowers, yard piping, in-basin piping,
diffuser assemblies, support components, and installation.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Tank: Vertical walled reactor within which aeration occurs.
B. Diffuser Unit: Fabricated unit including diffuser support frame and flexible
membrane which releases air to the water.
C. Diffuser Assembly: Fabricated assembly including two diffuser units and
assembly mounting components.
D. Air Drop Pipe: Vertical piping section from out-of-basin header stub to in-basin
aeration system.
E. Air Subheader Piping: Air distribution piping from drop pipe to air distribution
laterals.
F. Air Lateral Distribution Piping: Air distribution piping from air subheader and
diffuser assemblies.
G. Air Header Piping: Out-of-basin air distribution piping from the blower building
to the header stubs.
H. Blower Manifold Piping: Air distribution piping between the blower discharge
and air header piping.
I. Aeration Grid: Associated piping and diffuser components connected to a
single drop pipe.
J. Standard Cubic Feet per Minute (scfm): Air at 68°F, 14.7 psia and 36% relative
humidity.
K. Maximum Pressure: Pressure in blower manifold piping at the specified airflow
rate.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 465131-Page 1

L. Oxygen Transfer Efficiency: Percent of oxygen in the air stream that is
dissolved to the wastewater under specified conditions of temperature,
barometric pressure, airflow rate, and dissolved oxygen concentration.
M. Standard Oxygen Transfer Efficiency: Percent of oxygen in the air stream that
is dissolved to clean water under conditions of 68°F, 14.7 psia, and zero
dissolved oxygen.
N. Air Distribution Uniformity: Variation in air distribution between diffuser
assemblies.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Design in-basin air piping and diffusers to diffuse air throughout the
aeration tank(s) in accordance with the specifications.
2. Design each diffuser assembly to provide uniform air release over the
specified airflow range.
3. Design the aeration system to provide the minimum specified oxygen
transfer efficiency at the specified airflow and operating pressure.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. A detailed engineering submittal package shall be provided in sufficient
detail and scope to confirm compliance with the requirements of this
section. Submittals shall be complete for all required components.
Partial submittals will not be accepted.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detailed layout drawings for aeration components. Layout drawings shall
include:
a. Layout and configuration of blower.
b. Layout and configuration of aeration system.
c. Detail drawings of diffuser assemblies showing components, method
of construction, and attachment mechanism to air header distribution
piping.
d. Detail drawings of all piping connections including drop to manifold,
manifold to header and inline connections for manifold and headers.
e. Detail drawings of pipe support components.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 465131-Page 2

C. Product Data:
1. Detailed listing of materials and materials of construction.
2. Product literature.
D. System Design and Performance Data:
1. Design calculations showing oxygen transfer based on guaranteed
performance.
2. Include complete air headloss calculations for the aeration equipment
from the top of the dropleg to the farthest diffuser bubble release point.
3. Design calculations showing uniform air distribution (+10% maximum
variation) through lateral piping and diffuser element orifice system.
4. Design calculations for piping and support components.
5. Product Experience:
a. The supplier shall have experience in the design, manufacture, supply
and commissioning of fine pore, flexible membrane aeration
equipment identical to the type specified for this project.
b. The equipment submitted shall be of proven design and shall be
referenced by at least three installations of similar size, having been
in successful operation for a period of not less than five (5) years prior
to bid date.
c. If the Contractor elects to submit a substitute aeration system that
does not comply with the above experience requirements, a bond
guaranteeing the replacement of the aeration system shall be
provided with the submittal package.
1) The bond term shall be for a period of five (5) years. This term
shall include the specified warranty period plus three (3) additional
years.
2) If the operation of the aeration system as determined by the Owner
is unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall repair, modify or replace the
entire aeration system in a manner acceptable to the Owner.
3) Normal wear or malfunctions due to neglect or abuse shall not be
considered justifiable reasons for unsatisfactory operations.
4) The presence of chemical compounds that are aggressive to the
membrane material are not considered as normal wear or service.
5) If the Contractor fails to correct deficiencies identified by the Owner
within six (6) months of the date first notified in writing, the Owner
shall at it's own discretion make all necessary repairs or
replacement and deduct all associated costs from the Contractor's
bond.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 465131-Page 3

6. Guarantee:
a. All equipment furnished under this contract shall be warranted to be
free from defects in materials and workmanship for twelve (12) months
from startup of the equipment or eighteen (18) months from shipment,
whichever occurs first. Defective part(s) shall be remedied by repair
or replacement of the defective part(s) only shipped freight included,
FOB original shipping point, by the Manufacturer. Labor is included in
this warranty.
E. Installation Instructions:
1. Installation requirements and guidelines for all proposed equipment shall
be provided and approved.
2. Information on the aeration system shall include but not be limited to:
a. Diffuser unit assembly.
b. Diffuser assembly attachment.
c. Piping components and assembly.
d. Piping support components.
F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Operations and maintenance manuals for all proposed equipment shall
be provided and approved.
2. Information on the aeration system shall include but not be limited to:
a. Air flow balancing.
b. Diffuser assembly maintenance and membrane replacement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Environmental Dynamics International, Columbia, Missouri. Environmental
Dynamics will be sole sourced contractor and manufacturer for supply and
installation of blowers, yard piping, header piping, and in-basin aeration
equipment.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Welded Stainless Steel Components:
1. Sheets and plates of Type 304L stainless steel conforming to AISI 304L
and ASTM A240.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 465131-Page 4

2. Limit carbon content to 0.30% maximum.
B. Non-welded Stainless Steel Components:
1 . Sheets and plates of Type 304 stainless steel conforming to AISI 304 and
ASTM A240.
C. Fasteners and Anchorage Components:
1. 18-8 series stainless steel.
D. PVC Pipe and Fittings:
1. Base material shall be ASTM D-1784.
2. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D-1785 and ASTM
D-2665. CPVC Pipe and Fittings
E. CPVC Pipe and Fittings
1. Base material shall be ASTM D-1784.
2. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM F-439 and ASTM
F-441 .
2.3 AERATION EQUIPMENT
A. System Performance:
1. The aeration-mixing system shall be designed to meet the following:
a. Airflow = 2121 scfm maximum
b. Discharge Pressure = 12.5 psig
c. Diffuser Unit DWP = 1 inches H2O maximum
d. Design Diffuser Submergence = 23 feet maximum
B. Flexible Membrane, Fine Pore Diffusers:
1 . The EDI FlexAir Magnum 84P high temperature diffuser assembly shall
be furnished and installed.
2. Each diffuser assembly shall be factory assembled and include two
diffuser units and mounting saddle.
3. Diffusers unit shall have nominal dimensions of 3.5 inches in diameter
and 40 inches long.
4. The diffuser membrane shall be fully supported over full length and
July 2021 Project#19.00305 465131-Page 5

circumference with a 3.5 inch CPVC membrane support frame.
a. Use of a non-fully supported diffuser membrane is not acceptable.
5. The diffuser support frame shall be approximately 40 inches long and
have a full diameter mounting connection.
a. Use of non-full diameter mechanical connections including threaded
connections is not acceptable.
6. The diffuser membrane shall be held in place by two 304 stainless
clamps.
a. Retainer clamps shall be crimp type. Worm gear type clamps are not
acceptable.
7. Installation of the diffuser membrane shall be accomplished with the
removal and installation of the membrane clamps.
a. Disassembly of diffuser assembly to remove and install membranes is not
acceptable.
8. Individual diffuser units shall be provided with an internal end cap.
9. The diffuser unit shall be fully capable of operating under continuous or
intermittent conditions and shall be designed with check valve capabilities
to prevent entry of mixed liquor into the diffuser unit or air piping on air
shutdown or interruption of air supply. A minimum of three (3) check
valve features shall be provided, not limited to the following:
a. Membrane shall be elastic and allow openings to close when the air supply
is interrupted.
b. Membrane shall contract and close around full diameter support frame.
c. Membrane shall employ a non-perforated section that is aligned and seals
against the support frame, air distribution orifices.
d. Use of independent or internal check valve components is not acceptable.
10. Diffuser assemblies shall be completely factory assembled with diffuser
units, membranes and mounting saddle factory installed.
a. Field solvent welding or assembly of diffuser is not acceptable.
11. Diffuser assemblies shall be shipped to the jobsite assembled and
properly crated and protected for shipment and handling.
12. Diffuser saddle mount shall be ABS construction and shall be capable of
withstanding an external force of 7,500 inch-pounds without structural
failure of the air distribution pipe, diffuser units connection or mounting
July 2021 Project#19.00305 465131-Page 6

saddle.
a. Small diameter threaded connections to attach diffusers to the air
distribution header are not acceptable.
b. Saddle mount shall fully encompass the air distribution header and reinforce
the pipe section at the diffuser assembly connection.
c. Alignment plug shall be provided to ensure proper alignment and resistance
to rotation.
d. An 0-ring gasket shall be provided to ensure an air tight seal between the
mounting saddle and air header.
13. A minimum 3 inch diameter connection shall be provided between the
saddle mount and diffuser assembly.
C. Flexible Membrane:
1. Membrane material for the diffuser unit shall be EPDM rubber.
a. Alternate membrane materials are not acceptable.
2. Membrane shall be extruded in a single piece with the following
characteristics.
a. Membrane shall be 91 mm inside diameter with an overall length of 1000
mm.
b. Perforated length on diffuser membrane shall be 924 mm.
c. Membrane shall have a 20 mm non-perforated strip at the top and bottom
of the diffuser to reduce bubble coalescence.
d. Non-perforated membrane section shall be provided to seal off air
distribution orifices on the diffuser support structure.
D. Aeration System Piping:
1 . Out-of-basin air piping including blower manifold, air header, and header
stubs are required and are to be supplied by the Manufacturer.
a. Header stubs shall extend to the inside top of the wall and terminate with a
full diameter, horizontal face, flange.
b. Out-of-basin piping may be unlined ductile iron, galvanized steel, stainless
steel, or painted carbon steel.
c. The Manufacturer shall provide an isolating/balancing valve for control and
distribution of air to the aeration grid and to allow isolating of the grid for
inspection and maintenance on the header stub.
d. Isolation/balancing valve shall be positioned for accessibility from the top of
the tank.
2. Drop pipe shall be provided with a flanged top connection and plain end
bottom.
July 2021 Project#19.00305 465131-Page 7

a. Drop pipe shall extend from the top connection to within 2 feet of the air
manifold.
b. Material of construction for the drop pipe shall be schedule 5, 304 stainless
steel.
c. Drop pipe shall connect to air manifold piping by means of a wrap-around
clamp adapter.
3. All submerged manifolds and header components shall be schedule 40, PVC
minimum.
a. Use of non-reinforced diffuser connections including threaded diffuser
mounts is not acceptable.
4. Pipe supports shall be all stainless steel construction.
a. Supports shall accommodate longitudinal movement in the piping
components due to the thermal expansion and contraction over a
temperature range of 100°F.
b. Supports shall restrain the axial and rotational movement of the pipe while
providing for unrestrained longitudinal movement.
c. Supports shall allow leveling of the air piping with 2 inch minimum vertical
adjustment at each support.
d. Each pipe support shall be connected to basin floor by at least 2 anchor
bolts.
e. The integrated pipe support assembly shall be designed to withstand the
associated uplift force of the piping and diffuser assemblies with a minimum
design factor of safety equal to ten (10).
E. Spare Parts:
1. The Contractor shall furnish all recommended spare parts for one (1) year of
operation, including but not limited to:
a. Four (4) - EDI FlexAir Magnum Model 84P diffuser assemblies completely
factory assembled.
2.4 BLOWER SUPPLY
A. System Performance
1. See separate specification.
2. Blower shall be manufactured by Aerzen.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
July 2021 Project#19.00305 465131-Page 8

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturer shall furnish, inspect, store, and install aeration system, blower,
and yard piping in accordance with written instructions and approved
submittals.
B. Diffuser assemblies on a common grid shall be installed within an elevation
tolerance of ±1/2 inches.
C. Contractor shall provide all valves, air header piping, wall sleeves with seals,
wall pipes, and concrete pedestals as necessary to complete the system as
shown on the plans.
D. Air piping including blower manifold, header, and in-basin piping must be clean
prior to delivering air up the diffusers.
E. Manufacturer shall be responsible for cleanliness of piping and may be required
to manually clean pipe, or air or water flush piping as required.
3.2 START-UP
A. After installation is completed, the Manufacturer shall perform the following field
tests in the presence of the Engineer and the Owner.
1. Fill the reactor to the bottom of the diffuser assemblies.
2. Adjust the pipe supports and diffuser assemblies such that all diffuser units
are installed within ±1/2 inches of the design diffuser elevation.
3. Fill the reactor to a level of 2 feet above the top of the diffusers.
4. Release air to the system and inspect the system for air leaks at all piping or
diffuser connections.
5. Check all membrane for cuts or tears that may have occurred during the
installation.
6. Adjust any piping or diffusers that show leaks or disproportionate amount of
airflow.
7. Operate the blowers at the design air rate and observe air release and air
distribution patterns.
8. All water, air, power and labor associated with testing and adjustment of
diffuser assemblies are to be supplied by Contractor.
B. MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
July 2021 Project#19.00305 465131-Page 9

1. A manufacturer's representative shall be present at the job site to inspect the
installation of the equipment, start-up the system, and train operations and
maintenance personnel on the supplied equipment.
2. Services including a total of two (2) trip with a total of two (2) day onsite shall
be provided.
The EDI equipment included in this specification is covered by US Patent Nos. 5,059,358, 4,960,546,
5,013,493, 5,133,876 and additional pending patent applications.
END OF SECTION 465131
July 2021 Project#19.00305 465131-Page 10